JP6725822B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a predetermined game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state in relation to a special result of a game.

Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of changing a set value according to a setting related to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-238056

However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the case of fraud during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to notify an illegality to a gaming machine when power is restored.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, when a game result is a special result, information regarding a game is stored in a gaming machine including a control means capable of generating a special game state and a specific game state advantageous to a player. And, provided with a holding storage means capable of storing and holding the stored information even if a power failure occurs, the control means can start outputting a signal upon occurrence of the special gaming state, and after the special gaming state The signal can be output until the specific game state ends, and the holding storage is performed during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state. When an abnormality of the information recorded in the means is detected, a security signal for notifying the abnormality is output and the signal is not output.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to notify an injustice to a gaming machine when power is restored.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of turning on the power supply of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half of the main processing of game control. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the main processing of game control. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a performance display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of starting opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing starting switch common processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the first half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure reservation information judgment processing (the latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the pre-reading big hit judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 game processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 game processing (the first half). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 game process (latter half). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special processing 2 normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the fall lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a table exemplifying a big hit probability, a small hit probability, and a falling probability. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop design setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop design setting processing. It is a table exemplifying the sort of jackpot type. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during change in special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during special figure 2 change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of the process in the process of displaying the special figure 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (first half) during fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing (half) in fanfare/interval. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special processing 1 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 small hit end process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows reception command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading variable system command processing. It is the flowchart which shows the design command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hit type command processing. It is a time chart of setting suggestion production according to the first embodiment. It is a table showing an example of reliability of setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram of a setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of the 1st modification of the setting suggestion production which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a time chart of the 2nd modification of the setting suggestion production concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (first half) of the second modification of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the second modified example of the setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of the other setting suggestion production which concerns on 1st Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a screen transition diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect according to the first embodiment. It is a table which shows the correspondence of the work setting value of the game machine of 2nd Embodiment, the display probability setting value (setting example 1, 2, 3, 4), and production|generation control information. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing of the game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a display mode of a display probability set value of setting example 2 in a game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing a display mode of a display probability set value of setting example 3 or setting example 4 of a game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 1st modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 2nd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 3rd modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 4th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the 5th modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the example 2 of a setting in the game machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the single command system command processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of hall and player setting mode processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is another example of the front view of the game board in the setting change state according to the third embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timing of signal output etc. at the time of the special game state of the normal operation concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a normal restoration by power restoration. It is a timing chart which shows an example of timings, such as signal output, when a power failure occurs in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and a memory abnormality occurs by power recovery. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, normal restoration by power restoration, and shifting to a setting confirmation state. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of a signal output etc. at the time of a power failure occurring in the special game state which concerns on 4th Embodiment, normal restoration by power restoration, and shifting to a setting change state. Timing chart showing an example of the timing of signal output etc. when power is turned off after a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, normal recovery is restored by power restoration, and the state is changed to the setting change state Is.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame 12. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination member arranged inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is provided. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect or the like according to the progress state of the game. The illumination member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open top surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to a game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in the special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2 ). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also by the player operating the effect operation device during non-execution.

The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a short-time state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state ), is a small hit game state (small hit state).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (multi-turn type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is arranged on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball in the game area, in response to the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right hitting in which the game ball falls down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit at a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat plate-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game balls, and the launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is disposed behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage where the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball rolling on the stage part 40b is moved to the starting winning port 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It's easy to win.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, an ordinary variable prize device 37 (ordinary electric accessory, which has a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area) below the universal figure starting gate 34. It is set up. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that slides so as to retract from the front side to the back side so as to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that the starting winning port 36 facilitates winning of a game ball when left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 facilitates winning of a game ball when right-handing.

The movable member 37b is a slide open/close type ordinary electric accessory that operates via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general variable display game is a predetermined stop display mode. When opened, the game ball changes to an open state where it is easy for the game ball to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 (an easy winning state that is advantageous to the player).

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state by shortening the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or setting the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to a higher probability than usual, or the normal game state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state generated in, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. Even in the probability changing state (excluding the latent probability changing state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs redundantly.

In the game area 32 on the right side of the start winning opening 36, the lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 7) is retracted from the front to the back to open the large winning opening. A first special variation winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c is provided. The first special variation winning device 38 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower special winning opening, a lower special winning opening switch 38a (count switch) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. It should be noted that the first special variation winning device 38 makes it easier for a game ball to win when hitting to the right.

In the game area 32 above the normal variation winning device 37, there is an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper special winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right by the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). A second special variation winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the state of closing the special winning opening (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, By facilitating the inflow of game balls into the special winning opening, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, an upper special winning opening switch 39a (count switch) (see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, in the second special variation winning device 39, it becomes easier for the game balls to win when hitting to the right. The lower special winning opening switch 38a and the upper special winning opening switch 39a are collectively referred to as the big winning opening switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the jackpot is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. The game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (a specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. In addition to confirming that it is done, information (a specific area passing command etc.) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins the major winning openings of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) determines that the winning opening has won. The number of prize balls according to the type of is discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the lower game area 32, there is provided an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize. Further, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning devices 38, 39 and the vicinity thereof are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins (a board decoration device described later). (A part of 46) is provided.

Further, outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board body 30a, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. A display unit 52 (special figure 2 display device, lamp D2), a variation display unit 53 (general figure display device, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the universal figure variation display game, and starting (holding) of each variation display game A storage display unit for informing the number of storages (special figure 1 reservation display 54, special figure 2 reservation display 55, general figure reservation display 56) is provided. The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50, the first game state display unit 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for notifying that it is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal) D7), a second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs and notifies that the time-saving state has occurred, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. Third game state display section 59 (third game state display section, probability state display section, lamp D9) that indicates that the state has been reached, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning devices 38, 39) The round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D6) for displaying is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals), or plural It may be performed by turning on/off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the public figure display device 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the universal figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 is a lamp display unit 1 or 2 (LED) that executes variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as a symbol (a fourth special symbol described later), and the start of each special symbol variable display game. (Hold) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of stored memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display sections 1 and 2 blink as a variable display at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (millisecond)). While the variation time of the variation display in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the general figure display 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special figure 1 holding LED 2) display the special figure 1 holding number (first starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 holding LED 1, special figure 2 holding LED 2) display the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 finishes displaying the number of holdings when a big hit occurs, but displays the number of holdings when the jackpot state is not in effect (including a case where a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41). To do.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, general winning opening 35, starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening won the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21 via the.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state, and indicates a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By blinking the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the universal figure random number value extracted at the time of passing the universal figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and is in the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected as the starting prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the special map 2 It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored within a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detecting the start winning prize ball of the special figure variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each variation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in a special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting prize winning memories, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The storage number of the special figure starting prize winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning or the second starting memory to the normal variable prize device 37.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( It is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped manner after the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol).

In the present embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called simultaneous variation machine, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be set to the execution state simultaneously (both) independently of each other. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game (there is no small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game in the present embodiment), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the outlier result. To do. When a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped due to the disengagement result.

When a small hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted. In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time by the special figure 1 game processing timer is interrupted, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 2 variable display After the end of the small hitting operation relating to the game, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game can be restarted.

In addition, when a game ball is won in the normal variation winning device 37 by right-handing in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game starts to change, but basically changes for a long time (long change, for example, 10 minutes). Therefore, if a big hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game during this period, it will be forcibly disengaged and stopped.

Further, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

The decorative special figure variable display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) ) Is started in a variable display (scroll display) in order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure variable display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special figure variation display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), in the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol is repeated (flashing) by repeatedly displaying the light and the light off. fluctuate. The variable display of the lamp display sections 1 and 2 is stopped after a predetermined time from the start when the lamp is off, when the lamp is off, and when the jackpot is a big hit or a small hit, it is turned on.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In addition, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game may be in the execution state (running state) at the same time.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game. A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state where numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39, from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), by energizing the special winning opening solenoids (38b, 39b) (see FIG. 3). To be converted. That is, the special winning openings provided in the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time, the player has the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. Granted.

When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variation display game As a result, the specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and the small hit state is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small hit result mode. In the present embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment, but the small hit value (small hit judgment value) is different from the big hit value (big hit judgment value).

At this time, in the special variation winning devices 38, 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the special winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 3). In addition, the total opening time of the special winning opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so in the small hit state, the player can obtain a game more than in the big hit state. There is little value (number of balls acquired). In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the special winning opening is open, but the big hit state may be called a first special game state and the small hit state may be called a second special game state.

Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

A big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and a small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric role as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38, 39 is set. The condition device not operating means that the above-described specific flag is not set as in the case of winning the small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term that is generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of.

Specifically, in the case of a big hit, the special variation winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variation winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but the special figure variation display games are not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

Further, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch (38a). , 39a) is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. It is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, game microcomputer and CPU part 110 having an input port 111, an input part 120 having an input port, an output part 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU part 110, the input part 120 and the output part 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for operating. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value changing switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big winning probability or a small winning probability, but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a unique set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

Since the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are arranged at positions (operational positions) that cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure recovery, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF state of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined, for example, in six stages, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting) 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting changing process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1)→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → Setting value 4 (Setting 5, probability setting value 5) )→setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6)→setting value 0 (setting 1)→setting value 1 (setting 2)→... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of explanation, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same in the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the working setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

The probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting values 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and stores the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed, and already derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is set as a reach effect system (type) in which a special result mode (big hit mode) is different (expected degree is different). Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number in the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Random pattern generation circuit for generating random numbers for patterns, fluctuation patterns in special figure variable display games (including execution time of variable display games in various reach and variable display without reach) A clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a or an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a causes the special figure change display game to have a game result (big hit or miss), the special figure change display game as the current game state, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state), and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, any one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit 600 to perform control for paying out the ball.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 has a radio wave sensor 62 (a board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. The switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (normal variation winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the special winning opening switch 43 of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 (lower big winning) Mouth switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), the negative logic signals such as the high level 11V and the low level 7V supplied from these switches are input, and the positive logic signal of 0V-5V is input. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for conversion is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball discharge switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variation winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 43 are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, the second input port 123, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, the glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc. A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow are shown. The first input port 122 which takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is set so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and is a solenoid (genuine solenoid) 37c that opens the normal variation winning device 37, and a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b that opens the first special variation winning device 38 (large winning opening). The solenoid 1), the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b (the special winning opening solenoid 2) for opening the second special variable winning device 39, and the opening/closing data for the lever solenoid 86b for operating the lever to open the specific area 86. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signals of the universal electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line 50 on the current drawing side, and an external information signal that is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71. A driver 138d is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and outputs the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability set value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls can be acquired by counting the signal of the out-ball detecting switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and Includes special variation winning devices 38, 39 (large winning holes).

The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls/number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (the total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is in the state of big hit among the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from turning on the game machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the special winning opening (=so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio), out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (= a so-called ratio of commonly used characters (total character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300 is for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 as with the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

In the main control microcomputer 311, a program ROM 321, which is a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and the stored contents are retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure An FeRAM 323 that can be used, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that serves as a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect content and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the fluctuation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a DC voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage of the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to.

Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signals) and put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. In the CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the universal figure starting gate 34, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in to determine whether or not the general figure variation display game has missed.

Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the public figure display, the general figure variability display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, (0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the universal figure variation display game is out of alignment, control is performed to display the outlying result mode on the universal figure display.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning opening 36, the start winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit judgment of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

Also, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is based on the starting memory. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game balls flowing down the game region 32 to the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). To make.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of the effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a, for example, causes the special winning opening solenoid 39b to open the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 to perform control so that the game ball can flow into the special winning opening. ..

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. Opening the special winning opening until one of the conditions is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed so that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, duplicating and shortening the state is performed to perform normal power support (electric power support).

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time (general figure variation time) of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (eg, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (eg, 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) higher and higher than the ordinary probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variable winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. The high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a transition state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power is restored). As described above, depending on the ON/OFF states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, a setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 8).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 6B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 8).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) is entered and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear) is performed. Processing) is executed to initialize the RAM 111c (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 6B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 which is performed in a predetermined time period (4 msec (millisecond) in this embodiment). That is, the game control program corresponding to the control processing of the game microcomputer 111 is composed of a main program (caller routine) corresponding to main processing and an interrupt processing program (interrupt processing routine) corresponding to timer interrupt processing. ..

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 6A and 6B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is expressed as "A***".

As shown in FIG. 6A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Then, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up first and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) start up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping a command. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power supply delay timer measures time using a storage area (RAM area or register, which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, there is a situation in which the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 performed at the time of turning on the power cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring a standby time and a process of monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether a power failure occurs by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0 or not. Yes (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (result of A1010 is “N”), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read and write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port installed in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (result of A1016 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are on (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), the process of confirming the probability setting of step A1031-A1037 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), step A1041-1044 The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the normal power-on processing (when the power is restored) in steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 informs that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300 that has received the command for the main abnormality error notification notifies that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (data of the error display of “E1” in FIG. 9C) on the performance display device 152. To (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying the external device (the internal management device for the game hall (hall computer), the information collecting terminal, etc.) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated to wait, and the setting change operation (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned on) is performed again to wait for the power to be turned on. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

As described above, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting changing operation (the ON operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) of the abnormality by the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (error display data of “E1” in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As in the case described above, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process stands by.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1027 is “Y”), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value “1”) (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command in the process of changing the probability setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (during the setting confirmation state) processing is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation processing (FIG. 8) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "Y"), the process at the time of power failure of steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and the power failure has not occurred, the probability setting value can be changed in the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The setting confirmation status (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1038) and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). The effect control device 300 that receives the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is “Y”), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization processing (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and, for example, the winning rate, the base value (the winning rate in the normal gaming state), the role ratio, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a normal power source because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the processing is started, and the power failure restoration processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value when power is restored (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Process shifts to.

The command for RAM initialization sent in the process of step A1044 and the command for power failure restoration sent in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state (high-probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence/absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Be done. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the command for RAM initialization, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 and notifies the user of RAM initialization (RAM clear) by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46, for example. Do it for a second. Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes a screen designation command for designating the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing (when it is neither changing nor hitting) for both special figures 1 and 2, and is a restoration screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of the small hit symbol random number that determines the small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number), the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the general figure (random initial value random number) , The initial value of the random number of the falling lottery used in the falling lottery (the random number of the initial value of the falling lottery) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and the interruption is permitted (A1049). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are timer interrupts that are the processing units of the program. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the process.

In addition, in the case of big hit symbol random number, hit symbol random number, falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed every time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or 1, or may be a random update by which all values within the range appear in a scattered manner without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051) and executes a performance display editing process for editing the performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, performance information (such as a character ratio and a ball output rate) may be calculated. Further, when the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the power of the RWM is cut off is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, the process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process stands by until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing/confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed (result of A1304 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines the solenoid (special winning opening solenoid 38b, 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. Output processing for performing drive control of the actuator is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. The process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, and the upper winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring A winning opening switch/state monitoring process for performing (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened, etc.) is executed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1320) described later, it can be determined that the abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1317 and thereafter are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is "N"), the game control device 100 performs a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning opening at the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. Execute (A1312). Next, the special figure 1 game process for performing the special figure 1 variable display game is executed (A1313), and the special figure 2 game process for performing the special figure 2 variable display game process is executed (A1314). The details of the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1315). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1316).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1317). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality is executed (A1318).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud caused by vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1319). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1320). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special winning opening devices 38, 39 special winning opening switch 43 (lower special winning opening switch 38a, upper special winning opening switch 39a), specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), remaining ball exit Based on the input from the switch 73, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 is monitored, and when the abnormal discharge occurs, the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. The game balls that have passed through the special winning opening switches 43 of the special variation winning devices 38 and 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1321). Then, the performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1322). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt process returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing process. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. To the driver via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability setting value display data is the display probability setting value data displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among people related to the hall, if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). The same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) of the abnormality is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71 such as the big hit signal are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

The game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on when the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. +1 is updated, and the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability set value in the probability set value area is directly updated in response to the update of the work set value. However, the work set value of the RAM 111c is updated. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting value (setting value for work) under setting change is stored in the area, and the setting for work is set. A value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, if a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used in the game control, the effect control, etc. (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) (Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Example of display on performance display device]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a display example of the performance display device 152. The performance display device 152 is a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type when the dot Dp is included) display device, but each digit of the performance display device 152 has 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, and It consists of f, g and Dp.

In the example of FIG. 9A, while the probability setting is being changed, digit 1 to digit 3 is lit to indicate that the setting is being changed. On the other hand, in correspondence with the work setting values 0 to 5 which are switched each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated while changing the probability setting, the display probability setting value is set to, for example, "1" to "6" at the digit 0. The display is switched to light up.

In the example of FIG. 9B, when the probability setting value is not within the normal range and is abnormal (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403), and the digit 0 is set. Turns off. In addition, in the digits 1 to 3, the display of "SET" indicating that the setting is being changed is not turned off.

In the example of FIG. 9C, when the RAM is abnormal when the power is turned on (the result of A1022 is “Y”), or when the power is turned off and restarted during the probability setting change (before the setting change is completed). In (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the 7-segment display data error display “E1” when the game is stopped is lit and displayed in digits 1 and 2 (A1024).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A1312) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a starting opening 1 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), and obtains a hard random number as a big hit random number. Is executed (A2702). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a start mouth prize to the first start prize hole 36 (A2703). Then, if there is no starting mouth winning (the result of A2703 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2709.

The game control device 100 is in a state where the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and there is no time saving when the first start winning opening 36 has a starting opening winning a prize (the result of A2703 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is a non-existence state), that is, whether or not there is a special figure low probability & no time saving (during a normal game state) (A2704). If the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (during a normal game state). Then, in the case of the low probability state and the state without time saving (the result of A2704 is "Y"), that is, in the normal game state, the process proceeds to step A2707.

The game control device 100, when the probability of big hit occurrence is not in the low probability state (in the high probability state) or in the state of shortening the time (state with universal communication support) (the result of A2704 is “N”), A right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and effect command setting processing is executed (A2706). As a result, the effect control device 300 causes the display device 41 to display, as a warning, the right-handed instruction display for instructing the right-handed operation when the first start winning opening 36 is won in the special figure high probability state or the time saving state. Can be displayed in. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on withholding due to winning in the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). ).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a starting opening 2 winning award monitoring table for monitoring the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2) (A2709), and a hard random number as a big hit random number. A hard random number acquisition process for acquiring is executed (A2710). Next, it is determined whether or not there has been a starting mouth prize to the normal variation winning device 37 (A2711). If there is no start opening prize (the result of A2711 is "N"), the start opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is in operation (during normal power operation) when there is a starting mouth prize in the normal variable winning a prize device 37 (result of A2711 is “Y”). A determination is made (A2712). When the normal variation winning device 37 is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), it is determined whether or not an irregularity (general-purpose illegality) for the regular variation winning device 37 is occurring (A2713). When the number of illegal winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud determination number (for example, 5 or more), it is possible to determine that the fraudulent fraud is occurring. When the irregularity for the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

The game control device 100, when the fraud for the normal variable winning device 37 is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), sets a table for setting the information on hold by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (starting opening 2). Preparation (A2714), special figure starting port switch common processing is executed (A2715), and starting port switch monitoring processing is ended.

The game control device 100 does not execute the process of step A2713, but executes the processes of steps A2714 and A2715, when the irregularity for the normal variation winning device 37 is occurring (the result of A2712 is “Y”).

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process moves to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit. It is determined (A2905). When the number of reserved special-drawing figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special-drawing starting port switch common processing ends. When the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2702 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

After that, the game control device 100 extracts and prepares a falling lottery random number for drawing a fall from a high-probability state with a big hit probability of a special figure to a low-probability state (A2912), and stores a falling lottery random number. Save in the area (A2913).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a prize has been awarded to the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) (A2914). If the winning is not for the normal variable winning device 37 (the result of A2914 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2917. On the other hand, when it is a winning to the starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2914 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2915), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2916). ).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2917), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2918). Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as a performance command (A2919), and a performance command setting process (A2920) is executed to make the special figure starting mouth switch common. The process ends. The decoration special figure reservation number command is a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command for the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command for the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit is formed. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure holding information determination process (A2918) in the above-mentioned special figure starting port switch common process will be described. FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B are flowcharts showing the first half and second half of the special figure reservation information determination process (prefetch process, predetermination process). The special figure reservation information determination process is executed for the special figure 1 and 2 starting memories generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is a big hit (during a special game state) (A3001). When the big hit is in progress (result of A3001 is “Y”), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. When it is not a big hit (the result of A3001 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) is a winning (A3002). When the winning is to the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is “Y”), that is, when the winning is to the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1), the pre-reading processing (preliminary determination processing) is executed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step A3004 and subsequent steps.

If the game control device 100 is not a winning of the starting opening 1 (the result of A3002 is "N"), is the probability of a big hit a low probability state and a state without time saving (a state without general electric power support)? It is determined whether or not, that is, whether the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (A3003). When the special map low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A3003 is "Y"), the special map pending information determination processing is ended. That is, in the normal game state, if the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2) is a prize, the special figure hold information determination process is terminated without executing the prefetch process (predetermination process). In the normal game state, as will be described later, the special figure 2 variable display game often changes for a long time (long change) and is often forced to end due to a deviation result, so a prefetching process (preliminary determination process) is performed so as not to waste. Do not run.

The game control device 100, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), that is, other than the normal game state (time saving state or probability changing state), the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2 ), the process proceeds to step A3004 and subsequent steps in order to execute the prefetching process (preliminary determination process).

Then, the game control device 100 starts the prefetching process (preliminary determination process) and determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state, that is, whether or not the special figure is in high probability (A3004). .. When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. If the special figure is in high probability (the result of A3004 is “Y”), it is judged whether the random number of the falling lottery prepared in step A2912 is within the judgment value range of the falling win (A3005), and the look-ahead falling lottery corresponding to the judgment result. An information command is prepared as an effect command (A3006), and effect command setting processing is performed (A3007). Next, the game control device 100 prepares a low-probability determination flag for performing pre-reading big hit determination in the low-probability state (A3008). When there is no special figure high probability (the result of A3004 is “N”), there is no fall from the high-probability state to the low-probability state in the first place, so the step without performing the (A3005-A3007) prefetching process regarding the fall is performed. The processing moves to A3008.

After that, the game control device 100 executes a pre-reading big hit judging process described later based on the big hit random number prepared in step A2909 (A3009), and judges whether the judgment result of the pre-reading big hit judging process is a big hit (A3010). ). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3010 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a) is set (A3011). The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3019.

When the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is out of order (the result of A3010 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2). (A3013). In the case of the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “Y”), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the winning in the starting opening 2. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3014), and it is determined whether the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3015). When the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3015 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3016), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3017) and the process proceeds to step A3019.

The game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the outlier because the small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game when the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3013 is “N”) (A3018). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the determination result is not a small hit by the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3015 is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the deviation stop symbol information is set. (A3018). Then, the process proceeds to step A3019.

After steps A3012, A3017, A3018, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area (A3019). The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. Then, a low-probability read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3020), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3021).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability determination flag for performing the prefetch big hit determination in the high-probability state (A3022), and executes the processes of A3023-A3032 similarly to A3009-A3018. First, a pre-reading big hit determination process described later is executed (A3023), and it is determined whether the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit (A3024). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3024 is “Y”), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting mouth switch (starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a) is set (A3025). The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (A3026), and the process proceeds to step A3033.

When the determination result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is out of order (result of A3024 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning is the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 2). (A3027). In the case of the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “Y”), a small hit can occur in the special figure 2 variable display game executed by the winning in the starting opening 2. As a process, a small hit determination process described later is executed (A3028), and it is determined whether the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (A3029). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3029 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3030), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared small hit symbol random number is acquired ( A3031) and the process proceeds to step A3033.

The game control device 100 sets the stop symbol information of the outlier because the small hit cannot occur in the special figure 1 variable display game when the winning is not in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3027 is “N”) (A3032). ). That is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the deviation is set. Further, when the determination result is not a small hit by the winning in the starting opening 2 (the result of A3029 is "N"), that is, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, deviation stop symbol information is set. (A3032). Then, the process proceeds to step A3033.

After steps A3026, A3031, and A3032, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a special figure high probability (A3033). When it is in the special figure high probability (the result of A3033 is “Y”), the stop symbol information is overwritten and saved in the symbol information area (A3034), and the process proceeds to step A3035. The stop symbol information in the symbol information area is also used in a variation pattern setting process (A3038) described later. When it is not during the special figure high probability (the result of A3033 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3035 without overwriting the stop symbol information in the symbol information area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a high-probability read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3035), and executes the production command setting process ( A3036).

Subsequently, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a change pattern is executed (A3037), and a change pattern setting process for setting a change mode of the special figure change display game is executed as prefetching. (A3038). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A3039), effect command setting processing is executed (A3040), and special figure hold information determination processing is performed. finish.

The effect control device 300 receives both the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) and the read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability), but if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the read-ahead stop symbol command ( Pre-reading pattern command processing (low probability) is executed by using the pre-reading symbol type command processing (Fig. 51), and if the big hit probability at the time of reception is a high probability state, pre-reading symbol type command processing using the pre-reading symbol design command (high probability) (FIG. 51) may be performed.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the pre-reading big hit determination processing (A3009, A3023) in the special figure reservation information determination processing will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading big hit determination process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value (A3101), and judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as the judgment result (A3107), and performs the pre-reading big hit judgment process. finish.

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (result of A3102 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (A3103). When the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (the low probability determination flag) (the result of A3103 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A3105). ).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3106). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the pre-reading big hit determination process is ended.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (A3201).

When the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is not set (result of A3201 is "N"), the game control device 100 is a big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. It is determined whether or not it is in the state or in the small hit state (A3202). When the big hit state and the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game are not in effect (the result of A3202 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3203). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, the specific area switch monitoring processing for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3204).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (A3205). The special processing 1 game processing timer is clocked by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. When the big hit state or the small hit state of the special display 2 variable display game is in effect (the result of A3202 is "Y"), the process of steps A3203 and A3204 is not performed, but the process of step A3205 is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (A3206). When the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3206 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3217.

When the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (the result of A3206 is "Y"), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 assigns the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A3207). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the special figure 1 game sequence branch table (A3208). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 1 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number (A3209).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3209, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and sets the variation start and effect of the special figure 1 variable display game. Alternatively, the special figure 1 normal process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3210). Note that details of the special figure 1 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 displaying process. The special figure 1 changing process is executed (A3211). The details of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3209, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, The special figure 1 displaying process is executed to set the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing (A3212). The details of the process during displaying the special figure 1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” at step A3209, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the special winning opening opening process. A fanfare/interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A3213). Details of the fanfare/interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3214).

When the game process number is “5” in step A3209, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, setting of information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like. Residual ball processing is executed (A3215).

When the game process number is “6” in step A3209, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting a special figure 2 game wait time value (described later) or executing special figure 1 normal processing. The special figure 1 big hit end processing which sets the setting etc. is executed (A3216). The details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 1 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A3217), and then displays the special figure 1 The symbol variation control process relating to the container 51 is executed (A3218), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag indicating that the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted is set (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the processing of steps A3202 to A3216. Without preparing, after preparing the special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of special figure 1 indicator 51 (A3217), it executes the design fluctuation control processing which relates to special figure 1 indicator 51 (A3218) , Lever solenoid control processing for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3219), and the special figure 1 game processing ends. In this way, when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended, the time measurement (update) of the variable time timer (special figure 1 game processing timer) for measuring the variable time is stopped. By the symbol variation control process, the variation of the special symbol may be apparently continued on the special figure 1 display 51.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. 15A and 15B are flowcharts showing the first half and the second half of the special figure 2 game process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (A3301). When the big hit state of the special figure 1 variable display game is not in progress (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is executed (A3302). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the game balls are played by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Monitor the detection. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the specific area switch 72 is executed (A3303).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 (subtracts only 1) if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (A3304). The Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0.

If the special display 1 variable display game is in the big hit state (result of A3301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 performs the process of step A3304 without performing the processes of steps A3302 and A3303.

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (A3305). If the special processing 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3305 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A3323.

When the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y"), that is, when the special control 2 game processing timer has timed up or has already timed up, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 game processing timer. It is determined whether the number of repetitions is 0 (A3306). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (result of A3306 is "N"), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (A3307). A long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60,000 msec (60 seconds)) is saved in the area (A3308). As will be described later, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a long variation and the variation time is a long time (for example, 10 minutes), the variation time timer cannot be set with 2 bytes, so steps A3306-A3308. The timer value for long variation is counted by the number of times of repetition by the processing of 1. to prepare a timer with a long variation time for the special figure 2 variable display game.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3305 is "Y") and the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (result of A3306 is "Y"). The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (A3309). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired using the special figure 2 game sequence branch table (A3310). Subsequently, a subroutine call with the special figure 2 game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number (A3311).

When the game process number is “0” in step A3311, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, sets the variation start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and sets the effect. Alternatively, the special figure 2 normal processing for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3312). Details of the special figure 2 normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is "1" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time of the special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 displaying process. The special figure 2 changing process is executed (A3313). Note that details of the special figure 2 changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

When the game process number is “2” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets a big hit fanfare command according to the type of big hit if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, The special figure 2 displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is executed (A3314). The details of the processing during display of special figure 2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “3” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting is executed (A3315). The fanfare/interval processing is the same as that executed in the special figure 1 game processing, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “4” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The process of opening the special winning opening is executed to set the information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A3316).

When the game process number is “5” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process of setting an interval time and an ending time, setting of information necessary for performing a big hit end process, and the like, a big prize. The mouth remaining ball processing is executed (A3317).

When the game process number is “6” in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 jackpot end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process ( A3318). The details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

When the game process number is “7” in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process. The small hit fanfare processing is executed (A3319). Details of the small hit fanfare processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

When the game process number is “8” in step A3311, the game control device 100 performs a process for setting a small hit end command, a small hit setting for performing a small hit remaining ball process, and the like. The hitting process is executed (A3320).

When the game process number is "9" in step A3311, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary to set the ending time and the special figure 2 small hit end process. A hit remaining ball process is executed (A3321).

When the game process number is "10" in step A3311, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 small hit end process for setting the information necessary for executing the special figure 2 normal process. (A3322). The details of the special figure 2 small hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing based on the special figure 2 game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A3323), and then displays the special figure 2 The symbol variation control process related to the container 52 is executed (A3324), the lever solenoid control process for controlling the lever solenoid 86b is executed (A3325), and the special figure 2 game process is ended.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal process (A3210) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal process of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (A3401). If the special display 1 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3401 is "N"), the special process 1 normal processing number "0" is set as the special process 1 game processing number. (A3416), save in the special figure 1 game process number area of RWM (A3417). In addition, here, from the end of the change of the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 2) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 2 big hit), and of the special figure 2 variable display game. From the end of the variation of the small hit (during the processing during the display of special figure 2) to the end of the small hit operation (the processing of ending the small figure 2 small hit), it is determined that the variation display game of the special figure 1 cannot start.

When the special figure 1 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the left-handing instruction has been notified (A3402). If the left-handing instruction notification command has already been prepared as an effect command and transmitted to the effect control device 300, it can be determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been made. If the left-handing instruction has been notified (result of A3402 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3406.

When the left-handing instruction notification is not completed based on the left-handing instruction notification flag (result of A3402 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a left-handing instruction notification command as an effect command (A3403), and effect command setting processing. Is executed (A3404), and the left-handing instruction notification flag indicating that the left-handing instruction is notified (displayed) on the display device 41 or the like is set (A3405).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3406). When the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (result of A3406 is “Y”), the special figure 1 normal process number “0” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area of the RWM (A3402). As a result, the special figure 1 normal processing is repeated until the number of special figure 1 reservations becomes 1 or more.

If the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (a result of A3406 is "N"), the game control device 100 has fluctuation start probability information corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or time saving state. A command is prepared as an effect command (A3407), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3408). Then, the special figure 1 variation start process for starting the special figure 1 variation display game is executed (A3409). After that, a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared as an effect command (A3410), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3411).

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as an effect command (A3412), and executes an effect command setting process. Yes (A3413). The effect control device 300, which has received the remaining game number command, can grasp the number of times of time shortening variation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3414). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing or ((special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, a special figure 1 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 1 changing process, is executed (A3415). In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (A3312) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special process 2 ordinary process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (A3501). If the special display 2 variable display game cannot start changing (if it cannot start changing) (the result of A3501 is “N”), the special processing 2 normal processing number “0” is set as the special processing 2 game processing number. (A3518), save in the special figure 2 game process number area of RWM (A3519). Here, from the end of the fluctuation of the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game (during the process of displaying the special figure 1) to the end of the big hit operation (end processing of the special figure 1 big hit), the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is changed. It is said that it cannot be started.

When the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing (the result of A3501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (A3502). Special figure 2 When the number of reservations is not 0 (the result of A3502 is “N”), the variation start probability information command corresponding to the presence or absence of the current probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or time saving state is prepared as a production command. (A3503), the effect command setting process is executed (A3504). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3505).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number as an effect command (A3506), and executes effect command setting processing ( A3507). After that, the game control device 100 prepares a remaining game number command corresponding to the number of time-reduced fluctuations, which is the number of remaining special figure variation display games in the time saving state, as a production command (A3508), and executes production command setting processing. (A3509). The effect control device 300, which has received the remaining game number command, can grasp the number of times of time shortening variation.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the information during fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the special figure status area in the RWM (information addition) (A3510). Here, in the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing or (special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing) is set. Next, the special figure 2 changing process shift setting process, which is a process for shifting to the special figure 2 changing process, is executed (A3511). In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, for example, the process number “1” is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (the result of A3502 is “Y”),
It is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number is 0 (A3512). When the number of special figure 1 reservations is 0 (the result of A3512 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (A3513). When Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A3513 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (A3514). If the customer waiting demo has not been started (result of A3514 is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (A3515).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state as an effect command (A3516) and executes an effect command setting process (A3517). The production control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command can execute the customer waiting demo on the display device 41. Thereafter, the special figure 2 normal process number “0” is set as the special figure 2 game process number (A3518), and the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM is saved (A3519). As a result, the special figure 2 normal process is repeated until the number of special figure 2 reservations becomes 1.

On the other hand, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3512 is “N”), the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed, so the special figure 2 is not prepared, and the special figure 2 As the game process number, a special process number “0” of special figure 2 normal process is set (A3518), and it is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM (A3519). In addition, when the special figure 1 is changing (result of A3513 is “Y”), or when the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3514 is “Y”), the customer waiting demo command is prepared, etc. Instead, the special figure 2 normal process number "0" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (A3518), and the special figure 2 game process number area of the RWM is saved (A3519).

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3409) in the special figure 1 normal process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process.

The game control device 100 first sets a special figure 1 information setting flag (A3601a). The special figure 1 information setting flag is used for setting variation information (including distribution of prefetch variation patterns). Next, a random number is loaded from the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3602a), and the special figure 1 falling lottery random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603a). Then, the falling lottery process described later is executed (A3604a). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a big hit flag 1 setting process (A3605a) for setting deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure. Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) relating to setting of 1 stop symbol (symbol information), special figure 1 information setting for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variable display game The processing (A3607a) is executed.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3608a). ). Next, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variable display game, and a fluctuation start information setting process (A3609a) for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A3610a) is executed. Then, the time-reduction variation number updating process of updating the time-reduction variation number is executed (A3611a).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the process number in order to shift to the process during fluctuation of special figure 1 (A3612a), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A3613a). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (A3614a), and the signal regarding the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (ON data of the special symbol 1 changing signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A3615a).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (A3616a). Subsequently, the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking period of the special display 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area (A3617a), and the special figure 1 changing symbol number area The initial value of the symbol number being changed (for example, 0 indicating a non-illuminated symbol) is saved in (A3618a), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3505) in the special figure 2 normal process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a variation of the special figure 1 variation start process (FIG. 18) in which “big hit flag 1” is replaced with “big hit flag 2” and “special figure 1” is replaced with “special figure 2”. Since the same process as the special figure 1 variation start process is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Note that steps A3601b-A3618b in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process correspond to steps A3601a-A3618a in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, respectively.

[Falling lottery processing]
Next, the details of the falling lottery process (A3604a, A3604b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the falling lottery process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high-probability state (probability variation state), that is, whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (A3701). When it is not during the special figure high probability (the result of A3701 is “N”), the falling lottery process is ended.

When the special map high probability is in effect (the result of A3701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 has the value of the falling lottery random number of the target (special drawing 1 or special drawing 2) is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value. It is determined whether or not (A3702). When it is less than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “Y”), the falling lottery process is ended. If it is equal to or more than the falling lottery lower limit determination value (the result of A3702 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the target falling lottery random number is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (A3703). When it is larger than the falling lottery upper limit determination value (the result of A3703 is “Y”), the falling lottery process is ended.

The game control device 100, when the falling lottery upper limit judgment value or less (the result of A3703 is “N”), the value of the target falling lottery random number becomes a value between the falling lottery upper limit judgment value and the falling lottery lower limit judgment value. Therefore, the process at the time of winning the falling lottery is started, and first, the signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3704). Here, the signals relating to the high-probability end are off-data (off signal) of two big hits and off-data (off signal) of four big hits. As a result, a signal relating to the high probability end is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (hall computer or the like).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the end of high probability and shortening of time in the test signal output data area (A3705). High probability & signal regarding the end of time saving, for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off data, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal off data, special symbol 2 variation This is the off data of the time reduction state signal.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the left-handed instruction in the test signal output data area (A3706). Then, the number without saving time is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (A3707). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A3708), and the falling lottery process is ended. The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and there is no time saving state (normal game state).

As described above, in the probability variation state (with a high probability of special map), the falling lottery is executed at the start of each special map variation display game, and when the fall lottery is won, the probability variation state (high probability state) is changed to the normal game state (low probability state). Falling processing (A3704-A3708) of falling to the stochastic state is executed.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3605a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM (A3801). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM and prepared (A3802). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (A3803).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A3804). When the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A3804 is "N"), the big hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3805). ), it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3806). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3801 (A3807), and the big hit flag 1 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 1 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A3804 is “Y”), or if the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3806 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a big hit. The flag 1 setting process ends.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3605b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3901), and saves the deviation information in the large hit flag 2 area of the RWM (A3902). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the RWM, and is prepared (A3903). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 2). After that, the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A3904).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A3905). When the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A3905 is "N"), the big hit determination process for judging whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed based on the obtained big hit random number value (A3906). ), it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit (A3907). When the result of the determination is a big hit (the result of A3907 is “Y”), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved at step A3902 (A3908), and the big hit flag 2 setting process is executed. finish. The big hit flag 2 can be a big hit only when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area), so that the big hit flag 1 and the big hit flag 2 are prevented from being a big hit at the same time. ..

If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A3905 is "Y"), or if the determination result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A3907 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains it. Based on the big hit random number value, a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit is executed (A3909), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a small hit ( A3910). In this embodiment, the big hit random number value is also used for the small hit judgment (in other words, the same random number value is used for the small hit judgment and the big hit judgment). If the special display 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A3910 is “Y”), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A3901 (A3911), The jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. If the special display 2 variable display game is not a small hit (the result of A3910 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated without saving the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination processing (A3805, A3906) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing, the big hit flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging processes in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A4001), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A4002). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A4002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than big hit) as a judgment result (A4007), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (result of A4002 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (A4003). Then, when the special figure high probability is in progress (the result of A4003 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4004). On the other hand, when it is not in the special figure high probability (the result of A4003 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability corresponding to the probability setting value is set (A4005).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A4006). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A4007). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A4006 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A4008). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3909) in the big hit flag 2 setting process and the like will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination processes in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (A4101). The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined that a small hit.

As a matter of course, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) should be the same as the above big hit judgment in order to avoid that the same special figure variable display game result is a small hit and a big hit. It does not overlap with the value range (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value). In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a unique small hit random number may be provided.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the determination result (A4103) and ends the small hit determination process. ..

When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. Is determined (A4102). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is “Y”), deviation is set as the judgment result (A4103). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (the result of A4102 is "N"), the small hit is set as the judgment result (A4104). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, small hit probability, fall probability]
25(a), (b), and (c) are special figure variation display games determined as a result of the above-described big hit determination process (FIG. 23), small hit determination process (FIG. 24), and falling lottery process (FIG. 20). It is a table which illustrates the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the falling probability.

In the example of FIG. 25A, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (high probability state) is the same regardless of the probability setting values 1 to 6 (settings 1 to 6). On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the low-probability state (low-probability state) tends to increase as the probability setting value increases (higher setting), and the larger the probability setting value, the more likely it is for a big hit to occur to the player. Be advantageous. As described above, only one of the big hit probability in the low-probability state and the big hit probability in the high-probability state may be configured to increase as the probability setting value increases. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit determination value and the lower limit determination value in FIG. 23 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The big hit probability can be changed according to the probability setting value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the value of the big hit random number in accordance with the probability setting value in addition to the upper limit judgment value.

In addition, in setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, or setting 5 and setting 6, the jackpot probability (high probability state) and the jackpot probability (low probability state) are the same. Note that the jackpot probability may be different for all settings. Moreover, even if the jackpot probability is the same, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to each probability setting value (variable effect setting process described later).

In the example of FIG. 25B, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether it is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, or regardless of the probability setting value (setting). The small hit probability is the difference between the small hit upper limit judgment value and the small hit lower limit judgment value in FIG. 24 divided by the range of the big hit random number value. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure 1 variable display game, a small hit does not occur (the small hit probability is zero). In addition, a configuration in which a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game is also possible.

In the example of FIG. 25C, the falling probability as the winning probability of the falling lottery does not depend on the probability setting value (setting), whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, and It is constant (1/237) regardless of whether it is a 1-variable display game or a special figure 2 variable-display game. The falling probability is the difference between the falling lottery upper limit determination value and the falling lottery lower limit determination value of FIG. 20 divided by the range of the value of the falling lottery random number.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3606a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit, that is, whether or not big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (A4201). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4201 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4202). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (A4203), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and the special figure 1 stop design save area of the RWM is saved (A4204). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4205), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4206). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 1 display device 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4207). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4208), and a big prize corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4209). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4201 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (A4210), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4211). Then, the process proceeds to step A4212.

After the steps A4209 and A4211, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 1 command area (A4212). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4213). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4214), and clears the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4215). ). After that, the special figure 1 stop design setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3606b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit, that is, whether the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (A4301). When the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (the result of A4301 is "Y"), the big hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4302). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4303), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area of the RWM (A4304). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4305), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4306). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Then, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (A4307). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence/absence of a time saving state (with or without time saving) after the end of the big hit, and is used in the special figure 1 big hit ending process and the special figure 2 big hit ending process described later.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area of the RWM (A4308), and the big winning corresponding to the stop symbol number. The mouth opening information is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 special winning mouth opening information area of the RWM (A4309). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317. These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4301 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit, that is, the small hit information is present in the small hit flag 2 area. It is determined whether it is saved (A4310). When the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (the result of A4310 is "Y"), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4311). Next, the special figure 1 small hit design table is set (A4312), the stopped design number corresponding to the loaded small hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special design 2 stopped design save area (A4313). By this processing, the type of specific result is selected. Then, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4314). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (the result of A4310 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of the loss in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (A4315), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4316). Then, the process proceeds to step A4317.

After the steps A4309, A4314, and A4316, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as an effect command in the decorative special figure 2 command area (A4317). ). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes effect command setting processing (A4318). The decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4319), and clears the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) to 0 (A4320). ), the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) is cleared to 0 (A4321). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning hole 36, and the detection of the game ball in the normal variable winning device 37. The variable display game executing means for executing the special figure 2 variable display game as the variable display game is based on the above. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Example of special design jackpot design distribution]
FIG. 28 is a table exemplifying the distribution of the types of big hits of the special drawing 1 and 2 variable display games controlled by the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (big hit symbol distribution). Is. Note that the sort of jackpot type is common to each setting (each probability setting value).

FIG. 28 exemplifies a table that defines the types of big hits corresponding to the big hit stop design numbers acquired in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process and the distribution rate thereof. In the example of FIG. 28, the types of big hits are 10R probability big hits, 4R certainty big hits, and 10R normal big hits (100 time saving times), which are common to the special figure 1 and 2 variable display games. In addition, a 10R ordinary big hit (0 times for saving time) may be provided.

In addition, the distribution ratios of the 10R probability variation big hit, the 4R probability variation big hit, and the 10R normal variation big hit (100 time saving times) are 30%, 30%, and 40% in the special figure 1 variable display game, and in the special figure 2 variable display game The difference is 50%, 10%, and 40%. The distribution rate can be changed as appropriate.

[Special map 1 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 information setting process (A3607a) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 information setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets a fluctuation pattern selection information table (A4401). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 are acquired (A4402).

Here, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the latter-half fluctuations. The first-half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode before the start of the reach, and the second-half fluctuation is a fluctuation mode after the reach state is reached and corresponds to the type of reach (including normal reach, special reach, etc., including no reach).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (A4403), and when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4403 is "N"). ), the value is converted by adding the special figure 1 reserved number to the first half offset data in order to distribute the first half fluctuation according to the special figure 1 reserved number (A4404). Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 does not perform the process of step A4404, and updates and converts the first half offset data acquired in step A4402. Then, the process proceeds to step A4405.

Then, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4405), and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2) as the RWM variable distribution information. The information is saved in the information 2 area (A4406), and the special figure 1 information setting process ends.

[Special map 2 information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 information setting process (A3607b) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 information setting process.

First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is in a low-probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without normal electric power support), that is, low probability of special figure & no time saving (normal game). It is determined whether or not it is in the state (A4501). When the special figure low probability & time saving is not in progress (result of A4501 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4505.

If the special control low probability & time saving is not in progress (the result of A4501 is "N"), that is, if the game control apparatus 100 is in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is the time reduction final. It is determined whether there is fluctuation (A4502). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. If the special figure variation display game to be started is the final variation in time reduction (result of A4502 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A4506.

The game control device 100 sets the variation pattern selection information table when the special figure variation display game to be started is not the time reduction final variation (the result of A4502 is “N”) (A4503). Then, the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 are acquired (A4504). As described above, the first-half offset data (fluctuation distribution information 1) is a table pointer for allocating the first-half fluctuations, and the second-half offset data (variation distribution information 2) is a table pointer for allocating the second-half fluctuations. ..

On the other hand, when the special figure low probability & no time saving is in progress (the result of A4501 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure variation display game to be started is a high probability final variation. (A4505). Here, the high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the player wins the falling lottery (FIG. 20) and falls from the certainty-changed state (high-probability state) to the normal gaming state (low-probability state).

The game control device 100, when the special figure variation display game to be started is a high-probability final variation (result of A4505 is “Y”), or when it is a time reduction final variation (result of A4502 is “Y”). )), the first half offset data and the second half offset data for the final fluctuation are set in order to secure the time for notifying that it is the final fluctuation (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4511.

When the special figure variation display game to be started is not the high-probability final variation (the result of A4505 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit ( A4507). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A4507 is “N”), the first half offset data for the off/small hit of special figure 2 at the time of low probability is set (A4508), and the process of step A4510 Move to. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A4507 is "Y"), the first half offset data for the big hit of special figure 2 at a low probability is set (A4509). Subsequently, the latter half offset data for long-time fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (A4510). As a result, in the normal game state, the special figure 2 variable display game is changed for a long time (long change).

In the probability change state (high probability state of special figure) and the time saving state, since the latter half offset data for long time variation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not set, variation of normal variation time in the special figure 2 variable display game ( Short fluctuations compared to long fluctuations). As a result, in the probability changing state (special figure high probability state) and the time saving state, a small hit RUSH (rush) state in which a small hit frequently occurs due to the special figure 2 variable display game becomes possible.

After step A4504, A4506 or A4510, the game control device 100 saves the first half offset data (variable distribution information 1) in the variable distribution information 1 area of the RWM (A4511) and the second half offset data (variable distribution information 2). ) Is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area of the RWM (A4512), and the special figure 2 information setting process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609a) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group address table (A4601a), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares it (A4602a), and the fluctuation pattern random number of special figure 1 The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded as a random number from the 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4603a).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A4604a). When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment (the result of A4604a is “Y”), the 2-byte distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4605a), and the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of alignment. If not (in the case of a big hit or a small hit) (the result of A4604a is "N"), the distribution process based on the variation pattern random number 1 is executed (A4606a). The 2-byte sorting process and the sorting process are processes for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and deviating, and the random number for distribution has a 1-byte size for hitting and a 2-byte size for deviating. The hit size is 1 byte in order to save the data capacity, but 1 byte is sufficient because the appearance rate itself of the special figure 1 variable display game is low. In the case of a win (in the case of a big hit or a small hit), only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is used.

After step A4605a or A4606a, the game control device 100 acquires and prepares the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution (A4607a). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is stored as a random number from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holding 1) of the special figure 1 (A4608a), and the distribution process based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is executed (A4609a). .. Then, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (A4610a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the second half variation number (second half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half variation group table (A4611a), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (A4612a). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4613a). Further, the variable pattern random number 3 is loaded as a random number from the variable pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 1 (for holding number 1) and prepared (A4614a), and the distribution process based on the variable pattern random number 3 is executed (A4615a). The distribution process here is a process for selecting the first half variation number (first half variation pattern) of the special figure 1 variation display game from the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 3. is there.

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution, saves it in the first-half variation number area (A4616a), and ends the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (A3609b) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

The special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process in which "special figure 1" in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (FIG. 31) is replaced with "special figure 2". Therefore, detailed description will be omitted. Note that steps A4601b to A4616b in the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process correspond to steps A4601a to A4616a in the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, respectively.

By the above process, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3610a, A3610b) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area (for the reserved ball 1) of the used variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 of the special map 1 (A5001).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first-half variation time value table (A5002) and acquires the first-half variation time value corresponding to the first-half variation number (A5003). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A5004), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A5006), and saves the added value in the target special figure game processing timer area (A5007). Then, it is determined whether or not information is being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (A5008). When the information is not being set for the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A5008 is “N”), the information is being set for the special figure 2 variable display game, and thus the long fluctuation (long-term variation) of the special figure 2 variable display game is being performed. It is determined whether or not to start (A5009).

When the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game is not started (result of A5009 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 0 in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5010), When the long fluctuation of the two-variation display game is started (result of A5009 is “Y”), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (A5011). In the long variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, the variation time (for example, 10 minutes) that is not sufficient for the 2-byte timer is varied, so the predetermined number of repetitions (9 here) of the special figure 2 game processing timer is the number of repetitions. Set to the area. In a timer interrupt process with an interrupt cycle of 4 msec (millisecond), a 2-byte timer can set up to about 262 seconds.

For example, when a timer of 60,000 msec (60 seconds) is set by saving the above added value in the special figure game processing timer area and the number of times of repeating 9 times is further saved, timer interrupt processing (particularly, the special figure 2 The timer is decremented in the game process (FIG. 15) (A3304), and when the time is up (result of A3305 is “Y”), the number of repetitions is decremented by 1 (A3307), and the long variation timer is added to the game process timer. The value of 60000 ms (60 seconds) is set again (A3308). As a result, it is possible to set the long fluctuation time special game 2 fluctuation display game to a long fluctuation time of 60000 msec+(60000 msec×9)=10 minutes.

The variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game when it is not a long variation (repetition count=0) are the first half variation saved in the special figure game processing timer area in step A5007. It is the sum of the time value and the latter half fluctuation time value.

When the information regarding the special display 1 variable display game is being set (the result of A5008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A5012 without setting the number of times the timer is repeated.

After the steps A5008, A5010, A5011, the game control device 100 prepares a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number (A5012), and prepares a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number (A5013). .. Then, the effect command setting process for transmitting the variation command as the effect command is executed (A5014).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) of the target of the special figure variation display game to be started by -1 (A5015), and the target special figure fluctuation. The contents of the random number storage area relating to the display game are shifted (A5016), and the empty area after the shift is cleared (A5017). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information on the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the special display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. Variable commands including information about patterns are given, and these commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, details of the time shortening variation number update processing (A3611a, A3611b) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time shortening variation count updating process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not it is in the special figure high probability (during the probability change state) (A5101). When the special figure high probability flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability & time saving flag) is set in the special figure game mode flag area, it can be determined that the special figure high probability is in progress. When the special figure high probability is in progress (result of A5101 is “Y”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

When the special figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A5101 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure is in a short time (in a short time state) (A5102). When the special figure game mode flag area is set with the time saving flag (in the present embodiment, the special figure low probability & time saving flag), it can be determined that the special time saving is in progress. When it is not during the special figure time saving (the result of A5102 is “N”), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

The game control device 100 updates the number of times of time shortening fluctuation by -1 (subtracts only 1 when it is during special time saving and short time (with special probability low probability and with normal power support) (result of A5102 is "Y"). ) (A5103). The initial value of the number of times of time shortening fluctuation is the number of fluctuations in which the time saving state is maintained after the end of the big hit, and is set to 100 times, for example (big hit end setting process 2 described later). In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game starts changing, the number of times of time shortening change is updated by -1.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of times of time reduction variation is 0 (A5104). When the number of time shortening fluctuations is not 0 (the result of A5104 is “N”), that is, when the time saving state continues at the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game, the game control device 100 updates the number of time shortening fluctuations. The process ends. When the number of time shortening fluctuations is 0 (the result of A5104 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the time saving end in the external information output data area (A5105). Here, the signal relating to the time saving end is off-data of two big hit signals. As a result, a signal related to the end of time saving is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and, by extension, to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5106). The signal related to the time saving end here is, for example, off-data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off-data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the ordinary symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, or a normal electric role This is the off data of the object 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability number in the game state display number area (A5107), and saves the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area of the RWM (A5108). , The universal figure time saving flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (A5109), and the time shortening variation count updating process ends.

In this way, by executing the time shortening variation number updating process in the second embodiment, the normal game state (special figure low probability and normal state) is appropriately changed from the time saving state (state with low special figure probability and normal power support). It is possible to shift to a state without power support).

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 changing process (A3211) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5301). The number of times of symbol determination number output is used in the symbol determination number signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination number signal generated when the stop symbol of the special figure variable display game is determined to the external device. To be done. Next, the decoration special drawing 1 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and prepared as a performance command (A5302), and a performance command setting process is executed (A5303). After that, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5304), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5305).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 1 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 (A5306). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is the out-of-order symbol of special figure 1, and 2000 msec if the big hit symbol of special figure 1.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a failure (A5307). If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is off (the result of A5307 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 1 stop symbol. It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322).

If the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not out of order (in the case of a big hit) (the result of A5307 is “N”), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 2 (the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed). Or not (A5308). Toku-zu 2 is not changing (result of A5308 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5319. If the Toku-zu 2 is also changing (result of A5308 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the below-mentioned Toku-zu 2 displaying process is being executed (A5309).

When the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (the result of A5309 is “Y”), the game control device 100 moves to the process of step A5311. When the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5309 is “N”), the symbol decision count output count is updated by +1 (A5310). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 2, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 1 (display time of the special figure + 4 msec) is set (A5311), and is displayed in the special figure 2 game processing timer area. Save time (A5312). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. 4 msec is added because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 2 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3304), and therefore is added. As a result, the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 1 and the actual display time of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 can be aligned. It should be noted that if the stop display of Toku-zu 2 has already been started, the display time will be reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares the off-design command of the decoration special drawing 2 as a production command (A5313), saves it in the decoration special drawing 2 command area (A5314), and executes the production command setting processing ( A5315). Then, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5316), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5317). After that, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5318). In the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 2, a process number "2" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or a process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game at the result of being out is executed.

By the processing of steps A5311 to A5318, the result of deviation of the special figure 2 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 2 variable display game) is set in the special figure 1 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 1 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 2 displaying process (end of the special figure 2 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is in execution (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game has a hit result (big hit), the special figure 2 variable display game will be lost. As a result, the fluctuation will be forced to end (forced end).

The special figure 1 changing process is performed at the end of the change time, that is, when the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area set in step A5007) is up (A3206). Since the result is executed “Y”), when the special figure 1 variable display game of the hit result stops changing, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly ended (forced end).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 1 command from the decoration special drawing 1 command area and saves it in the winning symbol command area (A5319). Next, the round number upper limit value information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A5320). The winning opening opening information is loaded and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5321). After that, the information saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of a big hit) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (A5322). Next, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1 for setting the special figure 1 displaying process is executed (A5323), and the special figure 1 changing process is ended. In the special figure 1 display processing special process 1 display processing, the special figure 1 game processing number area saves the process number “2”, executes the process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game, etc. Perform the processing required to shift to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 2 variable display game (during change of special figure 2), if the special figure 1 variable display game hits, the special figure 2 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forced to terminate as a result.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 changing process (A3313) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 changing process.

The game control device 100 first updates the symbol confirmation count output count by +1 (A5401). The symbol determination frequency output frequency is used in the symbol determination frequency signal editing process (a part of the external information editing process) that outputs the symbol determination frequency signal generated when the stop symbol of the variable display game is determined to the external device. .. Next, the decoration special drawing 2 command is loaded from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and prepared as an effect command (A5402), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5403). After that, a decoration special figure 2 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5404), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5405).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the special figure 2 as the display time (stop display time) of the stop symbol of the special figure 2 (A5406). For example, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is 600 msec if the stop symbol pattern is a deviating symbol of special figure 2, 600 msec if the big hit symbol of special symbol 2, and 136 msec if the small hit symbol of special symbol 2. is there. It should be noted that the display time of the outlying symbol and the big hit symbol of the special figure 2 is the same, but is longer than the display time of the small hit symbol of the special figure 2.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a failure (A5407). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is off (the result of A5407 is “Y”), the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of off) is the special figure 2 stop symbol It is loaded from the save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not out of order (the result of A5407 is "N"), the game control device 100 is also changing the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed). Is determined (A5408). Toku-zu 1 is not changing (result of A5408 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5423. When the special figure 1 is also changing (result of A5408 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (A5409).

The game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 game interruption flag when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5409 is "N"), that is, when it is a small hit (A5412). The decoration special figure 1 interruption command is prepared as an effect command (A5413), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5414). Then, the process proceeds to step A5423. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is running (during change of special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 variable display game will be changed to the special figure 1 game. It is interrupted by interrupting the measurement of the variable time by the processing timer. In this case, the derivation of the result of the special figure 1 variable display game (display of the stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol number) is postponed, and the special figure 1 that was interrupted after the end of the small hitting operation related to the special figure 2 variable display game The floating display game can be restarted.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a special figure 1 displaying process described below is being executed ( A5410). When the processing during the display of special figure 1 is being executed (result of A5410 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A5415. When the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed (the result of A5410 is “N”), the symbol determination frequency output frequency is updated by +1 (A5411). Subsequently, as the display time of the special figure 1, a display time of a value obtained by adding 4 msec to the display time of the special figure 2 (display time of the special figure + 4 msec) is set (A5415) and displayed in the special figure 1 game processing timer area. Save time (A5416). Here, 4 msec is the interrupt period (predetermined time period) of the timer interrupt process. The reason why 4 msec is added is that the special figure 1 game processing timer is updated by -1 in the next special figure 1 game processing (4 msec corresponding to the interrupt period is subtracted) (A3205), so that it is added. As a result, the display time of the actual stop symbol of special figure 2 and the display time of the stop symbol of special figure 1 can be made equal. If the stop display of the special figure 1 has already started, the display time is reset here (the display time is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases).

Next, the game control device 100 sets and prepares an outlier design command of the decoration special map 1 as an effect command (A5417), saves it in the decoration special drawing 1 command area (A5418), and executes effect command setting processing ( A5419). Then, a decoration special figure 1 stop command for stopping the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is prepared as an effect command (A5420), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5421). After that, the special figure 1 in-display process shift setting process 2 for making settings for executing the special figure 1 in-process is executed (A5422). In the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 2, a process number "2" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or a process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game at the disengagement result is executed.

By the processing of steps A5415 to A5422, the result of deviation of the special figure 1 variable display game (including the decorative special figure 1 variable display game) is set in the special figure 2 changing process which is the control relating to the special figure 2 variable display game. The execution of the special figure 1 display process (end of the special figure 1 variable display game) is set. In this way, even if the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit, the special figure 1 variable display game is forced with a disengagement result. It will end the fluctuation (end of execution).

The special figure 2 changing process is performed at the end of the changing time, that is, when the special figure 2 game processing timer has repeated 0 times and the special figure 2 game processing timer is up (results of A3305 and A3306). Is executed for “Y”), the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly ended in variation (execution end) when the special result 2 variable display game in which the hit result changes.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the decoration special drawing 2 command from the decoration special drawing 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (A5423). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (A5424). Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is a small hit (result of A5424 is "Y"), the special pattern 2 information saved in the above-mentioned special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) It is loaded from the stop symbol save area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when it is a big hit) (the result of A5424 is “N”), the game control device 100 selects the upper limit of the number of rounds from the aforementioned special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area. Load the value information and save it in the round number upper limit value information area (A5425).
The special winning opening opening information is loaded from the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (A5426). After that, the information saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (A5427). Next, the special figure 2 in-display process shift setting process 1 for setting to execute the special figure 2 in-process is executed (A5428), and the special figure 2 changing process is ended. In the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1, the special figure 2 game process number area is saved, the process number "2" is saved, and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. Perform the processing required to shift to processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means (display time setting means) that sets the stop time (display time) for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, even if the game control device 100 is running the special figure 1 variable display game (during change of the special figure 1), if the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is disengaged. It constitutes a forced termination means that is forced to terminate as a result.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (A3212) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the processing during display of special figure 1.

The game control device 100 first loads the big hit flag 1 (which indicates big hit information or deviance information) from the big hit flag 1 area (A5701), and clears the big hit flag 1 area (A5702). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 1 (A5703).

When the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5704). ). For example, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is the ON data of the condition device operating signal, the ON data of the signal per special symbol 1.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5705), and executes an effect command setting process (A5706). Since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the big hit fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5707), and production command setting processing is executed (A5708).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5709). The signals here include two big hits of ON data (ON signal) and three big hits of ON data (ON signal). In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5710), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (A5711).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "3" as a process number in order to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5712), saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A5713), and performs the fanfare. /Processing setting processing during interval is executed (A5714), and the processing during display of special figure 1 is terminated.

In the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is executed. Specifically, as the signal for starting the big hit, one big hit signal of ON data (ON signal) and four big hit signals of ON data (ON signal) are saved in the external information output data area. Also, a signal relating to the end of high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area, and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Further, the time-reduction variation number area for holding the time-reduction variation number is cleared. In addition, the round number area is cleared to 0.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit) (the result of A5703 is “N”), that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is If it is out of alignment, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5715). The high-probability final fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation display game when the falling lottery (FIG. 20) is won. If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game executed this time is the time reduction final variation (A5716). The time reduction final variation is a final (eg, 100th) special figure variation display game in a time-saving state. If it is not the final time shortening variation (result of A5716 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A5724.

The game control device 100, when the high-probability final variation (result of A5715 is “Y”) or when it is the time shortening final variation (result of A5716 is “Y”), the probability information command (low) Probability) is prepared as an effect command (A5717), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5718). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5719), and the left-hand instruction command notification flag is cleared (A5720). After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (A5721). If the special display 2 variable display game is in the small hit state (result of A5721 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A5724.

If the special control 2 variable display game is not in the small hit state (the result of A5721 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A5722). Then, in order to turn off the second game state display portion 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is right-handed, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5723). , Clearing the change of special map 1 in the special map status area (information subtraction) (A5724). After that, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 1 normal process to shift to the special figure 1 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is displayed. The processing number is saved (A5725). Then, the process of displaying the special map 1 ends.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (A3314) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. 38A and 38B are flowcharts showing the procedure of processing during display of special figure 2. FIG. 38A shows the first half of the processing during display of the special figure 2, and FIG. 38B shows the second half of the processing during display of the special figure 2.

The game control device 100 first loads the small hit flag 2 (indicating small hit information or deviance information) from the small hit flag 2 area (A5801) and clears the small hit flag 2 area (A5802). Then, the big hit flag 2 (which shows big hit information or deviance information) is loaded from the big hit flag 2 area (A5803), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (A5804). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit based on the big hit flag 2 (A5805).

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit (the result of A5805 is “Y”), the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5806). ). For example, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is ON data of the condition device operating signal, ON data of the special symbol 2 hit signal.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the hit symbol command from the hit symbol command area and prepares it as an effect command (A5807), and executes an effect command setting process (A5808). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, this hit symbol command corresponds to the big hit symbol. Subsequently, the big hit fanfare command is prepared as a production command (A5809), and production command setting processing is executed (A5810).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability in the external information output data area (A5811). The signals here include two big hits of ON data and three big hits of ON data. In the present embodiment, it does not matter because there is no 2R jackpot, but the 2 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the low probability, and the 3 jackpot signals may be turned off in the 2R probability variation jackpot during the high probability. You may.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (A5812), and saves the big hit fanfare time in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A5813). Then, "3" is set as the processing number to shift to the fanfare/interval processing (A5814).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A5815), executes fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process (A5816), and ends the special figure 2 displaying process. .. The fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing is the same as that executed in the processing during the display of special figure 1.

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A5805 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines that the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit based on the small hit flag 2. It is determined whether or not (whether or not the small hit flag 2 is a small hit) (A5817). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit (the result of A5817 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game executed this time is a high-probability final change (A5818). When it is not the high-probability final variation (the result of A5818 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time reduction final variation (A5819). When it is not the final time shortening variation (result of A5819 is “N”), the process of steps A5820 to A5823 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5824.

The game control device 100, when the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (result of A5818 is “Y”), or when it is a time shortening final variation (result of A5819 is “Y”). )), a probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is prepared as an effect command (A5820), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5821).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability information command (low probability) in the RWM power failure recovery transmission command area (A5822), and clears the left-hand instruction command notification flag (A5823). After that, the hit symbol command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared as an effect command (A5824), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5825). Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, this winning symbol command corresponds to the small hit symbol.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small hit fanfare command as an effect command (A5826), and executes an effect command setting process (A5827). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (on-data of the launch position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5828), and the second game state display unit 56 (lamp D8-) that notifies that it is right-handed In order to turn on D10), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5829).

Next, in this embodiment, the game control device 100 clears the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area because the lower large winning opening is opened by a small hit (A5830), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area The illegality monitoring period outside flag is saved (A5831), the special figure 2 small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is executed (A5832), and the special figure 2 displaying process is ended. Although the big winning opening is opened by a small hit, the screen of the display device 41 may not be changed.

In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing, processing for shifting to special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing is executed. Specifically, "7" is set as the processing number in order to shift to the small hit fanfare processing, and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Also, the small hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, and the signal related to the start of the small hit (on data of one big hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area. Further, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 small hit (on data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) is saved in the test signal output data area, and the small hit midway information is saved in the special figure status area.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit (when the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit) (the result of A5817 is “N”), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. If the result is no, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is a high-probability final variation (A5833). If it is not the high-probability final variation (result of A5833 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game executed this time is the time-reduction final variation (A5834). If it is not the time reduction final variation (result of A5834 is “N”), the process of steps A5835 to A5839 is skipped and the process proceeds to step A5840.

The gaming control device 100, if it is a high-probability final change (result of A5833 is “Y”), or if it is a time-shortening final change (result of A5834 is “Y”), probability information command (low probability). Is prepared as an effect command (A5835), and effect command setting processing is executed (A5836). Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A5837), and the signal relating to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5838).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 turns off the second game state display section 56 (lamps D8-D10) for notifying that it is right-handed, so that the number in the left-handed state is displayed in the game state display number 2 area. Is saved (A5839), and the change in special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (A5840). After that, since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, "0" is set as the process number of the special figure 2 normal process in order to shift to the special figure 2 normal process, and the special figure 1 game process number area is displayed. The processing number is saved (A5841). Then, the process of displaying the special map 2 ends.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (A3213, A3315) in the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing will be described. 39A and 39B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the remaining ball counter for counting the remaining balls of the special variation winning devices 38, 39 is 0 (A6001). When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (result of A6001 is “N”), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6001 is “Y”). It is determined whether or not it is the first big hit round (A6002). If it is not the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A6010.

When it is the first big hit round (the result of A6002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (A6003). When the game ball has not passed through the universal starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "N"), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. That is, until the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 after the right hit is started, the process related to the big hit (the process of opening the special winning opening, etc.) is not performed.

The game control device 100 sets the information on the start of the big hit when the game ball has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 (the result of A6003 is "Y"), that is, when the right-hand hit is started. It is executed (A6004-A6009). First, the round number upper limit value table is set (A6004), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value information area is acquired from the round number upper limit value table, and the round number upper limit value area of the RWM is obtained. Save to (A6005). In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit values of the number of rounds are 10R and 4R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information of the round number upper limit value information area from the round number upper limit value table, and saves it in the RWM round LED pointer area (A6006). Then, in the present embodiment, since the upper special winning opening is opened in the big hit, the upper special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (A6007), and the fraudulent outside monitoring period flag is set in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the RWM. Is saved (A6008), and the ON output data of the accessory continuous actuating device operating signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A6009).

Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area by +1 (A6010). The number of rounds in the number-of-rounds area is cleared to 0 before the jackpot operation this time because it is cleared to 0 in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing. After that, a round command corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the number of rounds is prepared as an effect command (A6011), and effect command setting processing is executed (A6012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a big hit medium processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (A6013), and saves it in the big hit medium processing control pointer area of the RWM (A6014). Here, 0 is set as the initial value in the case of a pattern in which opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated during one round, and in the case of a pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once in one round, the initial value is suddenly set to the upper limit. Set the value (=21). In the case of a pattern in which opening and closing are repeated, the initial value may be not 0 but a value larger than 0 and less than the upper limit value (that is, starting from an intermediate value). Next, the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (A6015).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a lever solenoid operation round that operates the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6016). In this embodiment, the lever solenoid operation round is a big hit round 1 (first big hit round).

In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the operation data of the lever solenoid 86b (A6017). Here, the lever solenoid is opened so as to open the specific area 86 in a long time in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or the 4R probability variation big hit) and in a short time (an extremely short time) in the case of the normal big hit (10R normal big hit). The operation data of 86b is set. Specifically, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared to zero. On the other hand, when it is not the lever solenoid operation round (the result of A6016 is “N”), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (A6018).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "4" as the process number in order to shift to the process during the opening of the special winning opening (A6019), and determines whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game ( A6020). If it is a big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game (the result of A6020 is "Y"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (A6021), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 1 game processing. Save in the timer area (A6022). Special Figure 1 If the variable display game is not a big hit (the result of A6020 is "N"), this processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6023), and the special winning opening time is set to the special figure 2 game processing timer. Save in the area (A6024).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (ON data of the signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) in the test signal output data area (A6025), and outputs the special winning opening solenoid of the RWM. In the data area, the special winning opening on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 39b (big winning opening solenoid 2) is saved (A6026), the special winning opening count number is cleared (A6027), and the fanfare/interval processing is performed. To finish.

In addition, in the present embodiment, there is only a big hit that opens only the upper special winning opening, but it is also possible to provide two types of big hits that open only the upper special winning opening and big hits that open only the lower special winning opening, It is also possible to provide a jackpot that opens both the upper and lower winning holes.

[Special map 1 big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 big hit ending process (A3216) in the special figure 1 game process will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 big hit ending process.

The game control device 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the time reduction determination data (A6101). When the time reduction determination data is data without time saving, the big hit end setting process 1 is executed to shift to the normal game state after the big hit ends (A6102), and when the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, the big hit After the end, big hit end setting processing 2 is executed to shift to the time saving state (A6103).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether there is specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 86 (V winning opening) (A6104). As described above, in the jackpot round 1 (the first jackpot round) in the case of the probability variation big hit (10R or 4R probability variation big hit), the specific area 86 is opened for a long time (A6017), and the specific area switch 72 is set to the specific area. It almost certainly detects the passage of the game ball to V 86 (V winning) (specific region regular passage). Then, the game control device 100 can store, in the RAM, the specific area passage information indicating that the game ball has passed the specific area 86 (V winning) when the detection signal from the specific area switch 72 is received. is there.

Even in the jackpot round 1 in the case of a normal jackpot (10R regular jackpot), the specific area 86 is opened for a very short time, but the specific area switch 72 causes an accidental game ball to reach the specific area 86 (V winning opening). It may be possible to detect passage (V prize) (specific area irregular passage). In this case also, the game control device 100 can store the specific area passage information in the RAM.

When there is no specific area passage information (result of A6104 is “N”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A6106. On the other hand, when there is specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is “Y”), the big hit end setting process 3 is executed in order to shift to the probability change state (probability change state) after the big hit ends (A6105). In this case, the data set in the big hit end setting process 3 is overwritten on the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2, and the data set in the big hit end setting process 1 and 2 becomes invalid. Become.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the probability information command from the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (A6106). In the big hit end setting process 1-3, a probability information command indicating the presence or absence of a low probability or high probability probability state or a time saving state is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a specific area irregular passage (A6107). As described above, the specific area irregular passage (specific area abnormal passage) is a game ball passing through the specific area 86 in the case of a normal big hit, and the specific area regular passage (specific area normal passage) In the case of a probability variation big hit, the game ball passes through the specific area 86. For example, if the specific area passage information is generated in the case of a normal big hit, it can be determined that the specific area irregular passage has occurred. It should be noted that not only the regular passage of the specific region but also the irregular passage of the specific region causes a transition to the probability variation state (probability variation state) after the big hit ends.

When there is a specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “Y”), the game control device 100 adds the irregular probability variation information to the loaded probability information command and includes it (A6108). A performance command setting process is executed to set the command as a performance command (A6109). On the other hand, when there is no specific area irregular passage (result of A6107 is “N”), effect command setting processing is executed so that the loaded probability information command is set as it is as an effect command (A6109).

Next, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 1 (A6110), and saves the process number in the special figure 1 game process number area (A6111). Then, the signal regarding the end of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area (A6112). The signals relating to the end of the big hit here are off data of one big hit signal and off data of three big hit signals.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the signal regarding the end of the big hit in the test signal output data area (A6113). The signal regarding the end of the big hit here, for example, OFF data of the condition device operating signal, OFF data of the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, OFF data of the special symbol 1 signal, OFF data of the special symbol 2 signal Is.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the off number in the round LED pointer area (A6114). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A6115), and the special figure status region is cleared (A6116). After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (A6117), and the special figure 1 big hit ending process is ended.

This special figure 2 game wait time value is used for the determination of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game that has been forcibly ended (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) and for the next timer interrupt processing (FIG. 7). It is set to delay sometimes. Here, the special figure 2 game wait time value is 8 msec which is twice the interruption period (that is, 2 as the value saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area).

If the special figure 2 game wait time value is not set, the special figure 2 game process (A1313 in FIG. 7) immediately after the current special figure 1 game process in which the special figure 1 big hit ending process is executed ( In (A1314) of FIG. 7, since the determination of the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game has started (started within the timer interrupt processing this time), the special figure 2 variable display game is better than the special figure 1 variable display game. It will start first and may be a problem. Note that the special figure 1 game processing timer is not set in the special figure 1 big hit end processing, and therefore remains 0. Therefore, the determination of the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed in the next timer interrupt processing (special figure 1 normal processing during the special figure 1 game processing).

The special figure 2 game wait time value is set to a time (8 msec) twice as long as the interrupt cycle, but the special figure 2 game process immediately after the current special figure 1 game process (starts within the current timer interrupt process) This is because the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (decrease of 4 msec). In the special figure 2 game processing in the next timer interruption processing, the special figure 2 game processing timer is further updated by -1 (decreased by 4 msec) and becomes 0 (the result of A3305 is "Y"), and the special figure 2 variable display game. Of the fluctuation start of (special figure 2 normal processing during special figure 2 game processing) is performed. As a result, in the next timer interrupt process after the end of the big hit state in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing (special figure 1 game processing and special figure If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can start changing simultaneously. As described above, while the special figure 1 variable display game is in the big hit state, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with a deviating symbol (forced termination or originally unchanged).

After the end of the big hit state, if there is no particular problem in game control even if the special figure 2 variable display game starts earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, the process of step A6717 is omitted, and FIG. 2 It is not necessary to set the game wait time value.

[Special figure 2 Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 big hit ending process (A3318) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 big hit ending process.

Steps A6201 to A6216 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing are those obtained by replacing "special figure 1" in steps A6101 to A6116 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing with "special figure 2", respectively. Since the same processing as the processing steps A6101 to A6116 is performed, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit end processing, it is not necessary to provide the special figure 1 game wait time value. Since the special figure 1 game processing timer and the special figure 2 game processing timer are not set, they remain at 0, and the variation start of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will start in the next timer interrupt processing. If the start condition (starting condition) is satisfied after the determination (in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process) is performed, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game start changing at the same time. This is because it can be done.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A6102, A6202) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of no time saving state (no time saving) in the external information output data area (A6301). Here, the signal related to the start without the time saving condition is the off-data of the two big hit signals. The signal related to the start without the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (A6302). Here, the signal regarding the start without a time saving state is off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the off-data of the time shortening state signal, the off-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the off-data of the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without the time saving state in the game state display number area (A6303), and saves the universal figure without speed saving flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (A6304). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6305). The general/universal figure time saving flag indicates that the general/universal figure variation display game is not in a time-reduced variable state (time-shortened state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and not in a time saving state (universal power support state).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time shortening variation number area to 0 (A6306), and saves a signal related to left-handed instruction (for example, off data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6307). .. Then, in order to turn off the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) being hit to the right, save the number being hit to the left in the gaming status display number 2 area (A6308), and send it to the transmission command area at power failure recovery. The probability information command (low probability) indicating a low probability is saved (A6309), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A6103, A6203) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6501). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit is started (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the signal related to the start of the time saving state (with time saving) in the test signal output data area (A6502). Here, the signal regarding the start of the time saving state is off data of the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, on data of the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 variation It is the on-data of the time shortening state signal, the on-data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the on-data of the ordinary electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6503), and saves the flag indicating that there is a time saving state in the universal figure game mode flag area (A6504). The special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the mode flag area (A6505). The general/universal working hour reduction flag indicates that the general/universal character variation display game is in a time-reducing variable state (time-saving state, universal communication support state). The special figure low probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is low and is in a time saving state (universal power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 saves an initial value (for example, 100) in the time reduction variation number area that stores the time reduction variation number (A6506), and indicates the probability of being in the time reduction state in the power failure recovery transmission command area. The information command (time saving) is saved (A6507), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends.

Since the right hitting state is advantageous in that the right hitting is advantageous from the big hitting state, the right hitting setting process is not performed in the big hitting end setting process 2.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
Next, the details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6105, A6205) in the special figures 1 and 2 big hit end process will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the start of time saving in the external information output data area (A6801). Here, the signal related to the start of the time saving is the ON data of two big hit signals. The ON data of the big hit 2 signals is saved in the external information output data area when the fanfare of the big hit is started (A5709, A5811), and the ON data of the big hit 2 signals continues from the inside of the big hit to the external information terminal 71. Eventually, it will be output to an external device (such as a hall computer).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the start with high probability and time saving in the test signal output data area (A6802). Here, the signal regarding the start with high probability & time saving is ON data of special symbol 1 high probability state signal, ON data of special symbol 2 high probability state signal, ON data of special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, special symbol 2 is ON data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the number indicating that there is a time saving state in the game state display number area (A6803), and saves the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (A6804). The special figure high probability & time saving flag indicates that the probability of a big hit is high and is in a short time state (here, a time reduction change of the special figure change display game is executed).

After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal relating to the right-handing instruction (for example, ON data of the firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6805). Then, in order to turn on the indicator LED (first gaming state display portion 57) during right hitting, save the number under right hitting in the gaming status display number 2 area (A6806), and in the transmission command area at power failure recovery A probability information command (high probability) indicating a high probability is saved (A6807), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is ended.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (A3319) in the special figure 2 game processing will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing during a small hit fanfare.

First, the game control device 100 prepares a command for opening the small hit opening of the lower big winning opening as an effect command (A6901) and executes an effect command setting process (A6902). Next, "8" is set as the processing number (A6903), the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (A6904), and the small hit opening time (for example, 1600 msec) is set as the opening time of the lower special winning opening. Special Figure 2 Save in the game processing timer area (A6905).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves a signal (on-data of the special electric auditors product 2 operating signal) related to the start of the small hit operation in the test signal output data area (A6906), and in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. Save the data of the lower prize winning prize on (A6907). As a result, in the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game, the lower special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened.

Next, the game control device 100 clears the special winning opening count number area in which the number of counts (the number of detections) of the special winning opening count switch (the lower special winning opening switch 38a and/or the upper special winning opening switch 39a) is stored. (A6908), the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, only the small hit opening pattern in which the special winning opening is opened only once is used, but there may be a small hit opening pattern in which opening and closing of the special winning opening is repeated. Further, by setting "8" as the processing number, it is possible to shift to the small hit medium processing after the small hit fanfare middle processing is completed.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 small hitting end process (A3322) in the special figure 2 game process will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 small hit end processing.

The game control device 100 sets "0" as the process number to return to the normal process of the special figure 2 (A7301), and saves the process number in the special figure 2 game process number area (A7302). Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (off data of the special symbol 2 small hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A7303), and save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area. Yes (A7304). Further, the turned-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (A7305), and the special figure status area is cleared (A7306).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability of a big hit is a low-probability state and is in a state without time saving (a state without universal communication support), that is, low probability of special figure & no time saving (normal) It is determined whether or not it is in the gaming state (A7307). When it is not in the special figure low probability & no time saving (in the normal gaming state) (the result of A7307 is "N"), the processing of step A7310 and thereafter is executed.

The game control device 100 outputs a signal (off data of the launch position designation signal 1) relating to a left-handed instruction when the special figure low probability & no time saving (during normal game state) (the result of A7307 is "Y"). It is saved in the test signal output data area (A7308), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A7309), and it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended ( A7310).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended (result of A7310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 restart command as an effect command (A7311), and executes effect command setting processing. Yes (A7312). The effect control device 300 that has received the decorative special figure 1 restart command can execute processing for restarting the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. Then, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended. If the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (result of A7310 is “N”), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (A7313) without preparing the decoration special figure 1 restart command, and the special figure 2 Finish the small hit end process

For the same reason as the special figure 2 big hit ending process (FIG. 41), it is not necessary to provide a game wait time value in the special figure 2 small hit ending process.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 according to the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003) and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the above-mentioned CPU initial setting (B0002) and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes the RTC reading process of reading the time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 as the time counting means (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every one minute), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. Moreover, when the power supply to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power supply to the game machine 10 is turned on), the RTC reading process may be executed only once (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step B0003). Between B and B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. When reading the information, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time instead of RTC338 to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

In the RTC reading process, if the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,... ), a predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from the time interval by randomly selecting the time interval of the predetermined time according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn so that the larger the set value, the smaller the selection rate. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period of executing the predetermined effect with a probability according to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long execution period may be selected so that the larger the set value, the larger the selection rate.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, and changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and at the end of the game, the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by lottery the value to be added to the effect points (added value) with a probability according to the set value. For example, the lottery may be performed such that the selection rate of a large addition value increases as the setting value increases.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as a production random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0016).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is the frame switching timing (result of B0017 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0018). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

Moreover, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

In addition, the production control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including the LED (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling a performance device (a panel performance device 44, a frame performance device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, the accessory motion effect for driving the motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0021 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Details of the received command check process (B0014) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

Rendering control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is separately analyzed in the command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of commands to be received.

Subsequently, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the command content received in the command area for analysis (B1107), and analyzes the content received command analysis. The processing is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to Fig. 49. Further, the address of the analysis command area is updated (B1109), and then the processing of step B1101. It is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands loaded in step B1110 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is "N"), steps B1107 to B1110 are executed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing ends.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 48) described above will be described below with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the command type (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). If the MODE part is within the normal range (result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether or not the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the command of the type specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing the variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command (set by the variation start information setting process). If the MODE part indicates a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command process is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the hit system command (B1207). In addition, the hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) related to the effect during the hit, and includes, for example, a big hit fanfare command (set in the special figure display process), a round command (fanfare/ Set during interval processing), Interval command (set during big winning opening processing), Ending command (set during big winning opening processing), small hit fanfare command, small hit opening command (small hit round command), It is a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command) or the like. When the MODE part indicates a hit command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include a decoration special drawing 1 command and a decoration special drawing 2 command corresponding to the stop design pattern. Then, when the MODE part indicates a symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). If the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is “N”), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes a read-ahead stop symbol command. Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended. If the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a low probability state, the look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) is used to execute the look-ahead symbol type command processing, and if the jackpot probability at the time of reception is a high probability state, the look-ahead The look-ahead symbol-based command processing may be executed using the stop symbol command (low probability).

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes a look-ahead variation pattern command. Then, when the MODE part represents the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variation system command (the result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the details of the one-shot system command process (B1212) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). When the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). When the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command (the result of B1305 is “N”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. Then, when the MODE part indicates the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single shot system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the single command system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). The error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part indicates an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), an error/illegal setting process for reporting or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 then causes the MODE section to execute a command for effect mode switching (special figure displaying process). Etc.) is determined (B1317). When the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), the production control device 300 next indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning hole count command). It is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE part indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the count command (result of B1321 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1046 of FIG. 6B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE section does not represent the setting value information command (result of B1323 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change type command (B1325). As the setting change type command, for example, there is a command (A1030) during changing the probability setting. Then, when the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

If the MODE part does not represent a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during confirmation of probability setting. Then, when the MODE part indicates a command of the setting confirmation system (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for notifying the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). In addition, the command of the symbol stop includes, for example, a symbol stop command of the special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and a symbol stop command of the special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special drawing (B1331), and after all the symbols stop the game. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is a flag of “in fluctuation”, “in big hit”, “in small hit” depending on the timing of execution of this process. Is set.

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the command to stop the symbol (result of B1329 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot command processing.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 50, when the MODE part indicates a decoration special figure 1 interruption command (A5413) or a decoration special figure 1 restart command (A7311), the effect control device 300 determines that the decoration special figure 1 A process of suspending or resuming the variable display game may be executed.

[Read-ahead command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the prefetching symbol type command process (B1214) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the prefetch symbol type command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information of special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, the latest received special special figure hold number command is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether the command is a command (B1601). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1601 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is placed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. It is saved (B1602).

If the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), the effect control device 300 receives the latest decoration special figure hold number command as the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1603).

Rendering control device 300, after steps B1602 and B1603, sets a readahead variable system command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a readahead variable system command (B1604). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variable system command are set, so that the pre-reading variable system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the prefetching symbol type command processing is ended.

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the details of the prefetching variable system command process (B1216) in the above-described received command analysis process (FIG. 49) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetching variable system command (B1701). When the read-ahead variable system command reception wait flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the read-ahead variable system command is waiting to be received. If the prefetch variable system command is not waiting (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch variable system command processing is ended. If the prefetch variable system command is waiting to be received (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetch variable system command reception wait flag is cleared (B1702).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holdings of the design (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest pending information (B1703), and the pre-reading variation system command An intra-sub-readahead variation command MODE part is acquired corresponding to the MODE part (B1704). Next, the look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and the sub-prefetch variation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead variation system command is acquired (B1706).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not both of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the intra-sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the hold number. It is saved in the pre-reading variable command area (special figure 1 pre-reading variable command area or special figure 2 pre-reading variable command area) (B1708). Then, the prefetch command consistency check process is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

Note that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE part changes depending on the number of holds when the hold is started for the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half change becomes longer, and if a new hold occurs and the number of hold is large, the first half change becomes shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first-half variation is changed, the MODE part of the received prefetching variation type command is converted into the sub-internal prefetching variation command MODE section so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be treated the same.

Further, since the type of reach does not relate to the number of holdings, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub prefetch change command ACT unit does not depend on the number of holdings. However, since there are different types of reach in the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the latter half variation) of the look-ahead variation system command, the number becomes large and the check becomes difficult. .. For example, in normal reach, there are types such as normal reach-1 stop deviation and normal reach+1 stop deviation. Therefore, by converting the ACT units showing the reach of the same system into the same sub-prefetch variable command ACT units, the number is reduced and the load of the check process such as the prefetch command consistency check process is reduced.

Next, the production control device 300 determines that at least one of the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub prefetch change command MODE part and ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), it is determined that the command after conversion is abnormal, and the prefetch variable system command processing is ended.

When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (latest hold information) from the preread variable command area. (B1711), the prefetch lottery process regarding the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the prefetching effect include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye prefetching effect), a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest read-ahead look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is generated (B1713). When the latest hold prefetching effect occurs (the result of B1713 is "Y"), the point information corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated look-ahead effect (holding change notice, etc.) is an effect that starts immediately (B1715). When the prefetching effect that occurs is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1716). When the prefetching effect that occurs is not an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1715 is “N”), the display corresponding to the prefetching effect at the time of the hold shift (when the hold display is moved, when the number of hold is decreased) is set and saved (B1717). ). Then, the prefetching variable system command processing is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the latest pending lookahead effect does not occur (B1713 result is "N"), or when the generated lookahead effect is not an immediate start effect (B1715 result is "N"). As it is. The prefetching variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type corresponds to the outlier symbol, the 10R certainty variation jackpot symbol shown in FIG. 28, the 4R certainty variation jackpot symbol, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol.

[Variable command processing]
Details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing ends. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type are not consistent (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is set to change in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the above-described variation system command process (FIG. 54) will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special drawing type, production mode, setting value (probability setting value) The group address table is set (B2002), and the MODE part of the variable system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of reservations of the special figure type are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of reservations is large, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is acquired.

When the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the reachable variation, the effect control device 300, the number of effect points, the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type The address of is acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. Subsequently, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and set value (probability set value) is set (B2007), and the variation system command The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT section is acquired (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). In addition, the probability of the advance lottery depends on the set value. After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). It should be noted that the variation time command and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (advance effect) corresponding to the result of the advance notice lottery (B2011). Then, the content of the setting suggesting effect for suggesting the setting value (probability setting value, setting) is determined (B2012). Then, for example, a stop symbol setting process for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is executed according to the contents of the variable effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2013). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of setting suggestion effect (B2014). The display setting of the variable effect such as the reach effect is set (B2015), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (B2016). Next, display setting of hold decrease (hold shift) corresponding to the special map type is performed, and, for example, a display in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special map that changes this time is reduced is set, and the look-ahead effect during the hold shift is set. The corresponding display information (B1717) and the like are read (B2017). Subsequently, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2018). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

The voice number and the decoration number can be set not only based on the contents of the effect, but also by lottery with a lottery probability according to the set value (probability set value). In this way, the player can enjoy estimating the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2019), and the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the first to third special symbols. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation relating to is performed (B2020). The fourth symbol variation is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41 and/or the display device 41.

[Winning command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 49) described above will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE part of the received hit system command represents a fanfare (B2101). When the MODE part of the hit system command represents a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the big hit fanfare command or the small hit fanfare command, the fanfare effect setting process for setting the fanfare effect Is executed (B2102). It should be noted that the fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for this big hit. Then, the fan state is set to the game state flag showing the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2103), and the hit system command processing is ended. The upper limit number of rounds can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (decorative special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE part represents a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the round command or the small hit opening command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process and is currently The game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to "round" (B2105, B2106), and the hit system command processing is ended.

When the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit command indicates an interval ( B2107). When the MODE part indicates an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the current game of the gaming machine 10 is executed. The interval state is set to the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is ended. There is no interval command when the special winning opening is opened only once in the small hit, that is, when the small hit is one round.

When the MODE part of the received hit system command does not represent the interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the hit system command indicates the ending ( B2110). When the MODE part indicates the ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit system command is the ending command or the small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, the ending state is set to the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit system command process is ended.

If the MODE part of the received hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B2110 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the hit system command process without executing any process. To do.

The setting suggesting effect according to the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 66.

[Time chart of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 57 is a time chart of setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed a plurality of times in a predetermined period in association with the special figure variation display game. As a specific example, when a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is started, and the first setting suggesting effect (setting notification is given before normal reach (first reach) occurs. A case will be described in which a second setting suggestion effect is executed after the normal reach, after the normal reach, and after the SP reach has been generated (may not occur) and before the special figure variation display game ends. Note that the plurality of times may be three times or more instead of two times.

For example, when displaying the variable display game on the display device 41 (FIG. 4 ), the setting suggestive effect includes, for example, a character A, a character B, and a character C (characters having mutually distinguishable shapes, colors, and patterns). This is an effect that is displayed and can suggest the currently set probability setting value based on the number of displayed images, and occurs with a predetermined probability (about 1/100 in this embodiment). The setting suggestion effect is also generated at a timing other than the variable display game (for example, when the out-of-ball error is released).

The character A suggests, for example, so-called odd number setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of odd number probability setting values (1, 3, 5) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is. The internal probability setting values 1 to 6 stored in the probability setting value area correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively.

Character B, for example, suggests so-called even setting, and the currently set probability setting value is one of even probability setting values (2, 4, 6) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests (notifies) that there is.

Character C, for example, suggests that the currently set probability setting value is one of the high setting (probability setting values (5, 6)) of the probability setting values (1 to 6) (notification). To do.

In the first setting suggestion effect, one to three characters A, B, and C are displayed. In the second setting suggestion effect, 1 to 10 characters each of character A, character B, and character C are displayed, but it is easy to select 4 to 10 characters. For example, which character is used to make the setting suggestion intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by making the difference in the display numbers of the character A, the character B, and the character C more noticeable than in the first time. You may be able to judge.

[Reliability of setting suggestion production]
FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the reliability of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 58 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

In the setting suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect by the character (character) can be set by the number of the characters A, B, and C, for example. By selecting the number of characters with a winning probability according to the setting, it is possible to set the reliability according to the number of characters. When the lottery is performed by allocating to each number, the winning probability is a allocating rate (selection rate). In the case where the respective numbers are not sorted but randomly selected, the winning may be repeated (for example, 4 and 7), but in that case, one of the winnings is selected.

It should be noted that the setting suggestion effect may be performed only by the character with the maximum number of characters A, B, and C (the number of characters with the maximum number is selected by lottery regardless of the setting so as not to suggest the setting). To).

As described above, in the first setting suggestion effect, one to three characters A, B, and C are displayed. Therefore, when the number of each of the characters A to C is one, two, and three, each of them is drawn with a winning probability according to the setting.

As described above, in the second setting suggesting effect, 1 to 10 characters of each of the characters A, B, and C are displayed, so that the number of each of the characters A to C is 1, 2, 3, Cases of 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 are respectively drawn by a winning probability according to the setting. Since it is easy to select 4 to 10 winning probabilities, the winning probabilities of 4 to 10 are markedly made larger than the winning probabilities of 1 to 3 (extremely 1 to 3 winning probabilities are set to zero. To).

As shown in FIG. 58, the reliability is set to increase by 10% each time the number of displayed characters A, B, and C increases by 1, and when 10 are displayed, the reliability is set to 100%. can do. For example, one, two, and three characters C appear evenly in any setting, and the reliability of setting suggestion of high setting is low.

It is also possible to multiply the reliability shown in FIG. 58 by the ratio of the total number of characters displayed and the number of characters displayed most.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times during the variable display game. For example, the setting is performed so that the specific character increases in the first and second times, and the second setting. In the suggestion effect, the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the increase amount of the specific character (not the number of characters). For example, the setting suggestion by the character having the largest increase amount may be set as the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100), and the reliability of the setting suggestion may be notified based on the increase amount. It is possible.

The setting of the setting suggestive effect is performed in step B2012 and step B2014 of the variable effect setting process (FIG. 55) as described above.

[Expectation of big hit]
FIG. 59 is an example of a table showing the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and the big hit performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 59(A), in the present embodiment, when the setting suggesting effect has occurred, the expectation degree of the “big hit” is set high, and when it does not occur, it is set low. FIG. 59 is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate.

When the “big hit” occurs, the ratio of the “big hit” occurring after the setting suggestion effect is set to 80%, and the ratio of the “big hit” occurring without the setting suggestion effect is assigned to 20%.

On the other hand, when "disappearance" occurs, the rate of "disappearance" occurring after the setting suggestion effect is 1%, and the rate of "disappearance" without setting suggestion effect is 99%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player the expectation that a "big hit" will occur thereafter, and even if there is no setting suggestion effect, a "big hit" occurs and the player Can give a surprise to.

As shown in FIG. 59(B), the setting suggestion is made by changing the first mode (for example, number, color) of the character appearing in the setting suggestion effect, and the jackpot is made in the second mode (for example, size) of the character. It is also possible to inform the degree of expectation. As described above, it is possible to perform the setting suggestion effect intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) by the character having the largest display number among the characters A, B, and C. Further, if any one of the characters A, B, and C has a color different from the other characters, the setting control intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is suggested by the character having the different color. It is also possible to direct.

When a “big hit” occurs, the ratio of the “big hit” occurring after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a large character is 50%, and the “big hit” is indicated after the setting suggestion effect displayed by a character smaller than the large character. The ratio of occurrence of "" is 30%, and the ratio of occurrence of "big hit" without setting suggestion effect is 20%.

On the contrary, in the case where “out” occurs, the ratio of “out” occurring after the setting suggesting effect displayed by the large character is 1%, and after the setting suggesting effect displayed by the character smaller than the large character. The ratio of occurrence of "disappearance" is set to 1%, and the ratio of occurrence of "disappearance" without setting suggestion effect is set to 98%.

As a result, when there is a setting suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation that a "big hit" will occur thereafter, and by performing the setting suggestion effect with a character having a particularly large display, that expectation feeling can be obtained. It is possible to further increase the interest of the game.

[Screen transition diagram]
FIG. 60 is a screen transition diagram of setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. Here, a case will be described in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the decorative special figure variable display game in which the variable display progresses to the SP reach through the normal reach is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed before normal reach (first time) and when SP reach (SP3 reach) occurs (second time).

(A1) of FIG. 60 is a display screen when the decorative special figure variable display game is started. A variable display area 610 (left area 610A, middle area 610C, right area 610B) is arranged in the center of the display device 41, and decorative stop symbols “6, 1, 2” are displayed in the variable display area 610. Further, a variable display area 615 is arranged in the lower right corner of the display device 41, and the stop symbols “6, 1, 2” are displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, in the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 in the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, the number "3" and the special figure 2 reserved number indicating the special figure 1 reserved number are respectively displayed. The number "0" indicating the number is displayed.

In the first hold display unit 630a that displays the first start-up memory as the first hold display, the hold display 633 (first hold display) moves to the right (hold shift), and the first hold in the hold digesting area 640 of the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the display unit 630a moves. At the present moment, the hold display 633 is not displayed on the second hold display portion 630b that displays the second start memory as the second hold display (second start memory display).

After that, in (A2), the variation (↓↓↓) of the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is being executed in the variation display area 610 as the identification information, and the variation (↓↓) of the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) as the identification information. ↓) is being executed in the variable display area 615. In the left area 610A, the right area 610B, and the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are changing, respectively. In addition, a pending-change display 633 a indicating a hold (starting memory that has been a right to execute the special figure changing display game) relating to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the hold exhausting area 640. Further, the special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display a number "2" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and a number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. ing.

Further, at this time, as the first setting suggestion effect, a plurality of characters A (bear), characters B (frog), and characters C (tiger) are displayed on the display device 41. In (A2), two characters A, two characters B, and one character C are displayed, but at present, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character A is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character B is 20%. Is 20%, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is 10%, and it is not so clear which character is performing the suggesting setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100).

However, for a player who knows that setting suggestion production is performed multiple times, it is possible to predict that a highly reliable setting suggestion will be performed in the next setting suggestion production, so the setting suggestion is not clear in this way. Even in the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

The display position of each character is arbitrary, and may be displayed as a still image, or may be displayed as a moving image in which the facial expression and display position of each character move.

Next, in (A3), the reach state (normal reach) is entered, and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the first setting suggestion effect is finished. Although the display of each character is deleted in (A3), the display may be continued as it is. At this time, the character display 755a “reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

After that, in (A4), the reach develops from the normal reach state to the SP3 reach, the movie effect (video effect) is executed in the center of the display screen, and the left symbol and the right symbol are in the upper corners of the screen. Moving. At this time, the display of the character display 755a "reach" may be made to disappear.

In addition, with the transition to SP3 reach, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Here, for example, character A, character B, and character C are displayed around the movie effect (moving image effect), and more than the first setting suggestion effect is displayed. In (A4), three character A, four character B, and five character C are displayed. Note that, here, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion is made based on the number (5) of the characters C having the largest display number, and the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C (the probability setting value is either 5 or 6) is 50%. Can be displayed (set) as.

Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion of the character C is (5/12)×50%=20.20% by the ratio of the number of the character C having the largest number of displayed characters (5) and the total number of displayed characters (3+4+5=12). It can be displayed (set) as 8%. At this time, in order to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion by the character C is further high, in the setting suggestion effect of the second time, a lottery may be performed so that the display number of the character A or the character B is decreased from that of the first time. ..

Further, one character C is displayed for the first time, five characters are displayed for the second time, and the number of displayed characters is increased by four. Therefore, for example, the reliability of each character can be increased by 10%, and the reliability of setting suggestion of the character C for the second time can be 4×10% of the increased amount (regardless of the number).

After that, in (A5), the special figure variation display game ends and the setting suggestion effect also ends, and the big hit decoration stop design "3, 3, 3" is displayed in the variation display area 610, and the big hit stop design "3". , 3, 3” is displayed in the variable display area 615. Further, the character display 755b "Big hit!!" is displayed below the decorative stop design. At this time, the changing pending display 633a displayed in the pending digest area 640 disappears, and it can be confirmed that one pending is completely consumed.

Subsequently, in (A6), the big hit round game is started, and the big hit state (special game state) is entered, and the big hit round effect is started. In the setting suggestion effect (first and/or second time), by displaying the character A, the character B, and the character C larger than those shown in FIG. 60, the expectation of the jackpot is further increased. You may make it notify (set).

[Time chart of setting suggestion production (first modified example)]
FIG. 61 is a time chart of a first modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first modified example, a pseudo continuous effect consisting of a predetermined number of times (three times) of pseudo fluctuations is executed before the normal reach occurs, the first setting suggestion effect occurs during the second pseudo fluctuation, and the second time The setting suggestion effect occurs during the third pseudo variation. The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 55), for example. It should be noted that the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the decorative special symbol (identification information) is fluctuated and temporarily fluctuated a predetermined number of times (predetermined step) from the start to the end of one variable display game.

Character A (red) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called odd number setting, and for example, the currently set probability setting value is an odd probability setting value (1, 3) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 5).

Character B (blue) (FIG. 62A) suggests a so-called even number setting, and for example, the currently set probability setting value is an even probability setting value (2, 4) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). , 6).

For example, the character C (yellow) (FIG. 62A) has the currently set probability setting value set to a high setting (one of the probability setting values (5, 6)) among the probability setting values (1 to 6). It suggests that there is.

In the first modified example, a group effect of forming and displaying a character group of a plurality of characters is executed. In the character group, the total number of characters A (red) and characters B (blue) is constant (or almost constant), and the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even or odd is notified by the ratio. .. In the character group, the reliability of setting suggestion that the probability setting value is the high setting "5, 6" is further notified by the number of characters C (yellow). The characters A and B may have the same shape only by changing the color.

Since character A (red) and character B (blue) suggest odd setting and even setting, which are repulsion events, keep the total number constant and make the ratio of character A (red) and character B (blue). The reliability of setting suggestion can be reported.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the ratio of the number of characters A (red):character B (blue) is set to 7:3, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the ratio of character A (red):character B (blue) is changed. By setting the ratio of the numbers to 9:1, it is possible to increase the reliability of the setting suggestion of the odd number setting in which the probability setting value is odd. For example, in the ratio 7:3, the odd setting reliability is 70% (the even setting reliability is 30%), and in the ratio 9:1, the odd setting reliability is 90% (the even setting reliability is 10%).

On the contrary, in the first setting suggesting effect, the ratio of the number of characters A (red):character B (blue) is set to 3:7, and in the second setting suggesting effect, the character A (red):character B is set. By setting the ratio of the number of (blue) to 1:9, it is possible to increase the reliability of setting suggestion for even-numbered settings with probability setting values that are even. For example, in the ratio 3:7, the reliability of the even setting is 70% (the reliability of the odd setting is 30%), and in the ratio 1:9, the reliability of the even setting is 90% (the reliability of the odd setting is 10%).

Further, in the first setting suggestion effect, for example, the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is set to 5, and in the second setting suggestion effect, the number of characters C (yellow) is increased to 7, thereby increasing the probability. It is also possible to increase the reliability of setting suggestion that the set value is a high setting.

In the first modified example, in the first setting suggesting effect, for example, when the character C (may be the character A or the character B) is not displayed, or when none of the character A, the character B, or the character C is displayed, the big hit The degree of expectation can be set as low. Further, when all of the characters A, B, and C are displayed, it is possible to set them as having a high expectation of a big hit.

Further, it is also possible to set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit changes based on the change in the displayed size and color of the characters A, B, and C. In this way, when the character performing the setting suggesting effect shows that the expectation of the big hit is high, it may be performed together with the change of the display mode indicating that the expectation of the big hit is high in the changing hold display 633a of the holding digestion area 640. The display mode change may be prohibited so that the player can pay attention to the setting suggestion effect.

[Screen transition diagram (first modification)]
FIG. 62A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a first modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 62B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the first modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(B1) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A1) of FIG. Although (B2) of FIG. 62A is the same as (A2) of FIG. 60, the variable display displayed in the variable display area 610 is the first pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect.

Then, in (B3), the first pattern of the pseudo continuous effect (single effect) ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle area 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol that suggests the pseudo continuous effect. Is stopped. In addition, a character display 752 “pseudo twice” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo variation (pseudo consecutive times) to be started is displayed.

After that, in (B4), the second pseudo variation starts and the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. For example, as shown in (B4), an image in which a meteor shower composed of a character A (star type star), a character B (star type star), and a character C (triangle Δ) flows from the right side to the left side of the screen for a predetermined time. Then, it is possible to notify that the expectation of the big hit is high due to the flow of the video.

At this time, for example, the ratio of the number of displayed characters A (red) and the number of displayed characters B (blue) is 7:3, and it is notified that the reliability of setting suggestion of odd number setting is slightly high. ing. Further, since the character C (yellow) is also displayed, the display of this character C (yellow) makes it possible to suggest setting with a predetermined reliability (which may be good in FIG. 58). Note that the character display 752 “pseudo twice” may remain displayed or may be erased while the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) is being performed.

Next, in (B5), the first setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. Also, in (B5), the character display 752 “pseudo twice” may remain displayed or may be erased. The second pseudo variation continues in the variation display area 610.

Then, in (B6), the second variation ends and the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and in the middle region 610C, the pseudo continuous symbol indicating the pseudo continuous effect is stopped and displayed. At the same time, a character display 752 “pseudo three times” indicating the number of times of execution of pseudo variation (pseudo consecutive times) to be started is displayed.

Then, in (B7) of FIG. 62B, the pseudo variation (↓↓↓) of the third variable decoration special symbol (large symbol) is executed in the variable display area 610 for a predetermined time.

After that, in (B8), the second setting suggestion effect (group effect) is performed. At this time, as in (B4), an image in which the meteor shower consisting of the characters A, B, and C flows from the right to the left of the screen for a predetermined time. However, this time, the ratio of the display number of the character A (red) and the display number of the character B (blue) is 9:1, and the reliability of setting and suggesting that it is an odd number setting is higher.

In addition, since the number of characters C (yellow) displayed is increased from 5 to 7, it is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased by the increased amount (see FIG. 58). On the contrary, when the number of characters C (yellow) displayed in the second setting suggestion production is not increasing or decreasing, it is notified that the reliability of setting suggestion by the display of character C (yellow) is not so high. You can also do it.

Next, in (B9), the reach state is entered, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the setting suggestion effect (group effect) ends. In this case, since the pseudo continuous effect has ended, the pseudo continuous symbol is not displayed in the middle area 610C. Further, the character display 755 “reach” is displayed below the variable display area 610.

Then, in (B10), the special figure variation display game ends, and the stop symbols “3, 1, 3” of “out” are displayed in the variation display area 610 and the variation display area 615. At this time, the changing pending display 633a displayed in the pending digest area 640 disappears, and it can be confirmed that one pending is completely consumed.

[Time chart of setting suggestive effect (second modified example)]
FIG. 63 is a time chart of a second modified example of the setting suggestion effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the gaming machine 10, there may be a case where a character zone effect (for example, a notice effect using the entire display screen) is performed with a predetermined probability based on a winning prize with a high expectation of a big hit. It can notify that the degree of expectation is high.

Therefore, in the second modified example, setting suggestion effect is performed with a predetermined probability when entering the character zone, and the fact that the setting suggestion effect appears to notify that the expectation of the jackpot is higher than that when only the character zone occurs.

Further, the character zone continues until the hold that triggered the entry of the character zone is exhausted, and during that time, the variable display game is played a plurality of times along with the expiration of the hold. At this time, the setting suggestion effect is performed each time the variable display game is started, and the reliability of the setting suggestion is increased each time the game is repeated.

As described above, in the second modified example, the character zone effect is executed as the pre-reading effect based on the hold (pre-reading zone effect) over a plurality of special figure variable display games, and the pre-reading variable command processing (FIG. 52). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the character zone effect is generated at a predetermined timing (timing) such as when the special figure variation display game in execution has a high expectation of a big hit, and is executed over a plurality of variation display games. It may be any one, and may be set in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 55) or the like.

In the second modification, in the case where the first starting memory (or the second starting memory may be used) already has three holdings (holding 3, holding 2, holding 1), holding with a high expectation of a big hit (holding 0) occurs. Consider a case where the winning is won and the holding is exhausted in the order of holding 3, holding 2, holding 1, and holding 0.

When the hold 3 is consumed, the first setting suggestion effect is performed, when the hold 2 is consumed, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, and when the hold 1 is consumed, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, When the hold 0 is exhausted, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed.

In the first setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, two characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and probability setting values for high settings are displayed. Character C that suggests is not displayed (0 is displayed).

In the second setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and three characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed. One character C that suggests is displayed.

In the third setting suggestion effect, for example, three characters A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and a high setting probability setting value is displayed. Four character Cs that suggest “” are displayed.

In the setting suggestion for the fourth time, for example, three character A that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, five characters B that suggest setting odd probability setting values are displayed, and probability setting value of high setting is displayed. Seven character C that suggests are displayed.

In this way, the number of characters displayed that suggests the setting intended by the effect control device 300 (game control device 100) is increased each time the number of special figure variation display games is increased. In FIG. 63, since the display number of the character B is increased and is larger than that of the character A, the reliability of the setting suggestion that the probability setting value is even is higher than the reliability of the setting suggestion that the odd is odd. It can be judged as high.

Further, since the number of characters C displayed is 0, 1, 4, and 7 as the number of special figure variation display games increases, the display mode (increase amount) of characters C indicates a high setting. It is possible to notify that the reliability of the setting suggestion is high.

On the contrary, if the number of characters C displayed does not increase or decreases even if the number of special figure variation display games is repeated, the reliability of setting suggestion that the character C is displayed at a high setting depends on the display mode (decrease amount). It is also possible to notify that it is low.

[Screen transition diagram (second modification)]
FIG. 64A is a screen transition diagram (first half) of a second modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. FIG. 64B is a screen transition diagram (second half) of the second modified example of the setting suggestive effect performed by the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment.

(C1) of FIG. 64A is a display screen at the time of starting the decorative special figure variable display game, and the stop symbol is displayed similarly to FIG. 60 (A1). The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "4" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number and the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. ..

In (C1), the hold display 633 (hold 3) moves to the right (hold shift) in the first hold display portion 630a that displays the first start-up memory as the first hold display, and at the same time as the hold exhaustion area 640 in the rectangular frame. The hold display 633 at the right end of the first hold display unit 630a moves.

Here, the hold display 633 (hold 0) displayed on the first hold display unit 630a is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing setting suggestion effect. As a result, the hold display 633 (hold 0) indicates that the color is changed to a display mode different from that of another hold and the expectation is high, but the display mode may be omitted.

After that, in (C2), the same variable display as in (A3) of FIG. 60 is displayed, and the digestion of the hold 3 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating the pending (holding 3) related to the special figure changing display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number displayed by the special figure 1 reserved number display unit 650 is “3”.

In addition, when starting to consume the hold 3, the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the character zone is entered, and the background (color, pattern, etc.) displayed on the display device 41 is changed.

In (C2), three character A (bear) are displayed, two character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is not displayed.

By the way, as described above, the hold display 633 (hold 0) is pre-determined as having a high expectation of a big hit at the time of winning and performing setting suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to rush into the character zone when the hold 0 is won (the stage before (C1)). However, the attention to the hold 3 can be increased by causing the hold 3 to enter the character zone.

After that, in (C3), the first variable display game ends, the stop symbol “3, 2, 9” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, the hold 3 is already digested. At this time, the character A and the character B are moved to positions that do not overlap the stop symbols “3, 2, 9” or are erased, so that the first setting suggestion effect is also ended.

Next, in (C4), the same variable display as in (C2) is displayed, and the holding 2 is started to be consumed. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 2) related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is “2”.

In addition, when starting the digestion of hold 2, the second setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) are displayed, three character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. One is displayed.

After that, in (C5), the second variable display game ends, the stop symbol “5, 7, 8” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, the hold 2 is already digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are moved to positions not overlapping the stop symbols “5, 7, 8” or erased, so that the second setting suggestion effect is also ended.

Next, in (C6), the same variable display as in (C2) and (C4) is displayed, and the digestion of the hold 1 is started. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending (holding 1) related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is “1”.

In addition, when the hold 1 digestion is started, the third setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) are displayed, five character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Four are displayed.

After that, in (C7), the third variable display game ends, the stop symbol "4, 2, 1" of "off" is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display When 633a also disappears, the hold 1 is already digested. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are moved to positions that do not overlap the stop symbol “4, 2, 1” or erased, and the third setting suggestion effect is also ended.

Next, at (C8), the same variable display as at (C2), (C4), and (C6) is displayed, and the hold 0 is completely consumed. At this time, a pending change display 633 a indicating a pending state (holding 0) related to the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed in the pending digestion area 640. At this time, the special figure 1 reservation number displayed by the special figure 1 reservation number display unit 650 is “0”.

In addition, when the hold 0 digestion is started, the fourth setting suggestion effect is performed, three character A (bear) are displayed, five character B (frog) are displayed, and character C (tiger) is displayed. Seven are displayed.

After that, in (C9), the fourth variable display game ends, the stop symbol “2, 6, 9” of “out” is displayed in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615, and the variable hold display Since 633a also disappears, the hold 1 has already been digested, and the character zone is thereby ended. At this time, the character A, the character B, and the character C are deleted, so that the fourth setting suggestion effect is also ended.

[Other settings suggestive production]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of another setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 65, instead of the character, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 by the right hitting instruction display 620 of the hitting instruction display. In this case, the reliability of the high setting may increase as the number of right-hand hitting instruction displays 620 increases.

Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when the player can easily pay attention to the display device 41 even during the special figure variation display game. In the example of FIG. 65, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the special game state, such as during a big fanfare, a setting suggestion effect is executed by the right-handing instruction display 620. In this way, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a timing that is easily noticed by the player, so that the setting suggestion effect can be prevented from being overlooked. Further, at the time of a big hit fanfare, a display 621 "Aim at the gate!" is also displayed, which suggests that a game ball be launched into the universal figure starting gate 34 by right-handing.

When the distribution gate for selecting the maximum number of rounds for the big hit is provided in the game area 32 on the right side, the display 621 may indicate that the distribution gate is aimed instead of the universal figure starting gate 34. In addition, since the big hit round does not start until the game ball passes through the sorting gate, it is possible to further prevent the setting suggestive effect from being overlooked.

FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating another example of another setting suggestion effect. In the example of FIG. 66, the setting suggestion effect is executed when an error (here, a ball out error) that the player cannot intentionally wake up and interrupts the game. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by executing the setting suggestion effect at a timing that is easily noticed by the player.

During the decorative special figure variation display game started in (D1) of FIG. 66, as in (D2), a ball out error occurs due to detection of a shoot ball out switch signal, and an error display 623 “ball out error” is displayed. To be done. The character 625 is displayed together with the error display 623, and the display mode (facial expression) of the character 625 notifies the reliability of the high setting. After that, as in (D3), the character 625 is displayed together with the error cancellation display 627 “Error has been canceled” indicating that the error has been canceled. High reliability is reported.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
According to the above, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes the effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing the effect related to the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed, and the stop result of the variable display game is provided. In the gaming machine 10 that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when is a special result, a setting changing unit (setting key switch 93) that can change the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game , RAM initialization switch 112), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute a setting suggestion effect suggesting information (probability set value) about the set value a plurality of times in a predetermined period.

With the above configuration, by performing the setting suggestion effect in relation to the variable display game or the like a plurality of times in a predetermined period (for example, a period of one variable display game or a period of a plurality of variable display games), the player is produced. It is possible to focus on the game by focusing on, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect multiple times in one variable display game.

With the above configuration, by increasing the degree of attention to one variable display game in which the setting suggesting effect is performed a plurality of times, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control unit (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable display games.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect is performed at the timing of the effect such as the zone effect that is performed over the plurality of variable display games, so that the player can focus on the effect and can concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) sets the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestive effect to be executed later to be higher than the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestive effect to be executed first. , Set a setting suggestion effect multiple times.

With the above configuration, the reliability of the setting suggestion is set differently depending on the timing, so that the player can enjoy watching the production and waiting for whether or not the production of the setting suggestion appears at a specific timing. Therefore, by increasing the sense of expectation for the next setting suggestion effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect and can be concentrated on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game will be a special result by causing the setting suggestive effect to appear, and the mode of the setting suggestive effect. Changes the reliability of the suggestion of the setting suggestion effect.

With the above configuration, by associating the setting suggestion effect with the expectation degree of the special result (big hit), the player can pay attention to the effect even if the player is playing the game without worrying about the probability setting value. By associating the change of (1) with the reliability of the setting suggestion, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and concentrate on the game.

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays images of the same type (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41 in a plurality of setting suggestion effects, thereby making it possible to display a plurality of images. The effect modes of the one time setting suggestion effect are associated with each other.

With the above configuration, by displaying the same type of character a plurality of times in the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effects performed a plurality of times are related to each other, and by making it possible to grasp the setting suggestion by paying attention to it, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the production and to concentrate on the game.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed, and the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. In such a case, in the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, setting changing means (setting key switch 93, RAM initial) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) according to the setting related to the game. The production control means (production control device 300) is capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests information (probability setting value) regarding the set value, and by displaying the setting suggestion effect, a variable display. It is characterized in that it is possible to inform the degree of expectation that the stop result of the game will be a special result.

With the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked by performing the setting suggestion effect associated with the degree of expectation of the special result (big hit).

In the first embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect by displaying the characters (character A, character B, character C) on the display device 41.

With the above configuration, the setting suggestion effect can be performed in a simple and easy manner.

[Second Embodiment]
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted. The second embodiment relates to a display probability set value and a display method in a setting variable state (setting change mode).

[Work setting value, display probability setting value, performance control information]
FIG. 67 shows the work setting values, the display probability setting values (setting examples 1, 2, 3, 4) of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, and the production control information (production setting values, production setting values). It is a table which shows correspondence. Normally, the game control device 100 holds six work setting values “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” (setting values), and correspondingly, the probability setting values (information about the setting values. Therefore, the information "1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6" corresponding to the big hit probability (and the small hit probability) is provided. However, depending on the gaming machine 10, the big hit probability (and the small hit probability) corresponding to different probability setting values may be the same, and the number of types of setting the display probability setting value may be less than six. That is, in order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, even if the probability setting values used or stored inside the gaming machine 10 are different, if the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), big hit probability (and small hit probability). The display probability setting value associated with the hit probability is the same. The same display probability setting value means the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

In setting example 1 of FIG. 67, 1-6 is set as the display probability set value for the work set value 0-5, and the display probability set values are set to different values. In the setting example 2, all the display probability setting values corresponding to the six work setting values are set to "1". In the setting example 3, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values “0”, “1”, and “2” are set to “1”, and the work setting values “3”, “4”, “ This shows a case where the display probability setting value corresponding to "5" is set to "2". In the setting example 4, the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values “0” and “1” are set to “1”, respectively, and the display probability corresponding to the work setting values “2” and “3” are set. The case where the setting value is set to "2" and the display probability setting values corresponding to the work setting values "4" and "5" are set to "3" is shown.

In the setting example 1, since the display probability setting value changes each time the RAM initialization switch 112 as the setting value change switch is pressed, the operator operates the RAM initialization switch 112 to operate the gaming machine 10 (game control device 100). Can be identified as reacting.

On the other hand, in setting example 2, all the display probability setting values are "1" regardless of the work setting value, so that the display probability setting value is displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. It remains unchanged as "1", and it is impossible to identify whether or not the display of the performance display device 152 (display unit) responds to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 by the operator. Also in setting example 3, when changing the work setting value from “0” to “1”, “1” to “2”, “3” to “4”, and “4” to “5”, respectively. It is not possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) responds to the operation. Further, also in the setting example 4, the game machine 10 (game control) is used for the operation when changing the work setting value from “0” to “1”, “2” to “3”, and “4” to “5”, respectively. It is not possible to distinguish whether the device 100) is reacting.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, that is, each time the work setting value is changed, the display of the display probability setting value is temporarily displayed before and after the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed. The different display makes it possible to identify whether or not the game machine 10 (game control device 100) is reacting to the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The procedure of the probability setting change/confirmation processing of this embodiment is similar to that of the first embodiment, but before and after changing the work setting value (and the display probability setting value), the intermediate data (intermediate data) as the probability setting value display data is displayed. The feature is that (information) is transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152.

As shown in FIG. 68, the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “5”, and the probability setting value corresponding to the work setting value is set. After updating the probability setting values 1 to 6 of the area by +1 (A2410), intermediate data is set as the probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area (A2411), and the set probability setting value display data (intermediate data ) Is output (A2412). In this case, the performance display device 152 is in the display mode based on the intermediate data until the next probability setting value display data is output (A2404). When the time for displaying the intermediate data is short and the worker cannot recognize it, the timer for delaying the predetermined time may be activated after outputting the probability setting value display data (intermediate data).

As the display mode of the intermediate data, an LED (light-emitting member: here, 8 segments a, b, c, d, e, f, g, Dp for displaying the number of each digit of the 4-digit performance display device 152, etc. ), all the LEDs are turned off (FIGS. 69 and 70 ), all the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 71 ), and some specific positions of the LEDs are turned on (FIG. 72 ). Different from the display mode shown).

There is also a display mode in which the display of the display probability setting value is left as it is and at least one LED of a digit different from the digit displaying the display probability setting value is caused to emit light (FIG. 73 ).

Further, during the setting change, the information of the display probability set value transmitted (displayed) to the performance display device 152 by the game control device 100 (FIG. 3) includes LEDs (segments a, b) for displaying the display probability set value. , C, d, e, f, g), and dot data (Dp=1) (additional information) for lighting the dot-shaped LED (segment Dp) at the lower right of the LED. Is included. Therefore, as the intermediate data, a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 including the dots are extinguished (FIG. 74), and a display mode in which all the other LEDs are extinguished while maintaining the lighting of the segment Dp (FIG. 75). ) Is also available.

By the way, the game control device 100 transmits the information of the work setting value (probability setting value) after the setting change to the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4) (FIG. 6B, A1044), which the effect control device 300 receives. (FIG. 50, B1323) and can be used as an effect setting value (effect setting value). As shown in FIG. 67, the effect control device 300 includes effect control information “1” to “6” corresponding to the work setting values “0” to “5” as effect setting values. Here, the production control device 300 can make the productions have different contents based on the production control information “1” to “6” as the production setting values. For example, in the variable effect setting process of FIG. 55, the effect contents are set based on the set value. As a result, the attraction control information is changed every time the probability setting value is changed to give a variation to the attraction, so that the interest in the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

[Display example of performance display device]
FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The intermediate data in FIG. 69 has a display mode in which all the LEDs constituting the performance display device 152 are turned off.

Further, the probability setting value display data is such that the character “S” appears in the digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character “E” appears in the digit 2 and the character “T” appears in the digit 1 (“SET” Characters), and the LED is turned on so that the value of the current display probability setting value appears at digit 0. Further, in the probability setting value display data, the LED of the digit 1, the digit 2, and the digit 3 are turned off, and the value of the current probability setting value for display appears in the digit 0 (may be displayed in another digit). It is also possible to provide a display mode in which the LED lights.

As shown in FIG. 69, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the setting change mode (setting variable state) is set. In this case, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c of the game control device 100 (here, any one of "1" to "6" is set to the last final work setting value). (Corresponding to a value obtained by adding 1), and the character "S" appears in digit 3 of the performance display device 152, the character "E" appears in digit 2 and the character "T" appears in digit 1, respectively. In, the value "1" of one kind of display probability set value is lit and displayed, and the character "SET1" is lit and displayed as a whole. When the setting variable state (setting change mode) is entered, the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) has a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 is subtracted from the probability setting value). Value) may be stored.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, “0” to “1”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time. Alternatively, the display probability setting value “1” may be temporarily turned off while the lighting of “SET” is maintained.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "1"). Is lit up.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (for example, "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2"). Is lit up.

As described above, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the character "SET1" including the display probability setting value "1" can be identified to be temporarily turned off and then turned on again. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the lights are turned off. Also, each time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work set value in the work set value area is changed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the work set value last updated is set. The corresponding probability setting value is stored in the probability setting value area.

FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 or the setting example 3 of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment.

First, in FIG. 70, a case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 3 and the working setting value at the start of the setting change is “1” will be considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “1”. The character "SET1" to be turned on is displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“1” to “2”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value (for example, "2") is displayed. Lights up.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (“2” to “3”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "3" is lit and displayed. Thereby, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112.

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value is changed (1→1→2→2→2→1→...) along with the change of the work set value. In addition to the above change, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, it is temporarily turned off, then the next display probability set value is displayed, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all are turned off.

Next, in FIG. 70, a case where the display probability setting value is the setting example 4 and the work setting value at the start of setting change is “0” will be considered for convenience.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on, the performance display device 152 (digit 0) includes the display probability setting value “1” corresponding to the work setting value “0”. The character "SET1" to be turned on is displayed.

Then, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the value of the work setting value is changed (“0” to “1”), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET1" (the appearance does not change) including the changed display probability setting value "1" corresponding to the changed work setting value "1" is lit and displayed. It

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed again, the value of the work setting value is changed (from "1" to "2"), and all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off for a predetermined time.

Then, after the lapse of the predetermined time, the character "SET2" including the changed display probability setting value "2" corresponding to the changed work setting value "2" is lit and displayed. Thereby, the operator can visually recognize that the display probability setting value has been changed from "1" to "2" by pressing the RAM initialization switch 112. After that, although not shown, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed twice, the character “SET3” including the display probability setting value “3” corresponding to the work setting value “4” is lit and displayed.

As described above, every time the worker presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the display probability set value is (1→1→2→2→3→3→1→...・) and so on. Further, when the value of the display probability set value is switched, all the LEDs are turned off for a predetermined time, and then the next display probability set value is lit and displayed. Further, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, all the LEDs are turned off.

FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. Although the modified example described below will be described by taking the setting example 2 as an example, it is also applicable to the setting example 1, the setting example 3, and the setting example 4.

In the first modification, in the intermediate data, all the LEDs at the digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, and digit 0 of the performance display device 152 are lit and displayed in reverse to that of FIG. 69 (or FIG. 70 ). It suffices that any one of the digit 3, digit 2 and digit 1 is lit and displayed). On the other hand, in the probability setting value display data, all the LEDs are turned off at the digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 of the performance display device 152 (a mode in which the character "SET" is displayed as described above) and the digit 0 is set. It is provided with a display mode in which an LED constituting the display of the display probability set value is turned on.

The display mode of the display probability setting value in the first modified example transits similarly to FIG. 70. On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0 are turned on for a predetermined time by the intermediate data, and then the changed display probability set value is displayed. ..

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1, digit 0 are turned on. Turn on for a predetermined time.

FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The second modification shown in FIG. 72 makes a transition similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is displayed at the same digit (digit 0) as the display probability setting value, and has a display mode different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change.

As shown in FIG. 72, the intermediate data has, for example, a display mode in which only the LED (segment g) of digit 0 is turned on. In addition, in the second modification, any display mode can be applied as long as it is a display other than the display indicating the display probability setting value. Further, the other digits (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) may be arbitrarily displayed by the intermediate data.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the lighting display of the display probability setting value of the digit 0 disappears for a predetermined time, and instead, the LED (for example, the segment g) at the specific position of the digit 0 lights for a predetermined time. To do.

FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing a third modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The third modification example shown in FIG. 73 transits in the same manner as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display mode of the intermediate data. On the other hand, the intermediate data is also displayed in a digit (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1) different from the digit (digit 0) in which the display probability setting value is displayed, and at digit 0, the display probability setting value The display is maintained. That is, the intermediate data is different from the display probability setting value before the change and the display probability setting value after the change as a whole, but at the digit displaying the display probability setting value, the display probability setting value before the change is set. It is a display mode for sharing information.

In the third modified example, the game control device 100, the information of the display probability set value (digit 0) stored in the probability set value display data area and the intermediate data (digit 3, digit 2,) according to the third modified example. The digit 1) is combined and the combined data (intermediate data) is set as probability setting value display data in the probability setting value display data area (executed in A2411 in FIG. 68).

As shown in FIG. 73, the intermediate data is provided with a display mode in which all the LEDs of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are turned on, and the synthetic data is all of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1. A display mode is provided in which the LED is turned on and the LED for displaying the display probability setting value before change is turned on at digit 0. The probability setting value display data has a display mode in which the probability setting value is lit at digit 0 and lights off at digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1, but the character "SET" is displayed as described above. You may do so.

Therefore, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, all the LEDs of the digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 are lit for a predetermined time, and the lit display of the display probability setting value during that time is also maintained.

FIG. 74 is a schematic diagram showing a fourth modification of the display mode of the display probability setting value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 makes the same transition as the display mode shown in FIG. 69 except for the display by the display probability setting value (additional information).

In the fourth modified example, similarly to the above, the game control device 100 enters the setting variable state (first state) by turning on the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 and turning on the power of the gaming machine 10. .. At this time, the game control device 100 adds dot data (Dp=1) (additional information) to the probability setting value display data. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the displayed probability setting value “1.” displayed is a provisional value whose setting is being changed.

On the other hand, the intermediate data has a display mode in which all the LEDs of the performance display device 152 are turned off. Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, an LED that displays “SET” of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 on the performance display device 152, an LED that displays the probability setting value for display “1” of digit 0, And the LED (segment Dp) displaying the dot of digit 0 is turned off for a predetermined time.

By turning off the setting key switch 93, the setting is completed (second state). At this time, the game control device 100 indicates the probability setting value display data (including the dot data (Dp=0)) after the setting is changed (after confirmation), and the probability setting value display data (digit 3, digit 2, digit 1 “ The LED displaying “SET” has a display mode in which the LED is turned off) is set in the probability setting display data area to display the display probability setting value “1” after the setting change for a predetermined time, and then the display probability setting value. The lighting display of "1" is turned off.

FIG. 75 is a schematic diagram showing a fifth modified example of the display mode of the display probability set value of the setting example 2 in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment. The fifth modification shown in FIG. 75 makes a transition similar to the display mode of the fourth modification shown in FIG. 74 except for the display by intermediate data.

On the other hand, as the intermediate data, the LED displaying “SET” of digit 3, digit 2, digit 1 and the LED displaying the probability setting value for display of digit 0 are turned off, and the dot data (Dp=1) (additional information) ) Is displayed on the LED (segment Dp). Therefore, every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed, the LED for displaying the character "SET" of digit 3, digit 2, and digit 1 and the LED for displaying the probability setting value for display of digit 0 are displayed on the performance display device 152. While turned off, the LED (segment Dp) that displays the dot of digit 0 is kept on. Therefore, it can be easily identified that the display of the performance display device 152 responds to the operation and that the setting is being changed.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
The present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed based on establishment of a start condition), and when a game result is a special result, In the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, setting changing means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting) that can change setting values (working setting value, probability setting value) according to settings related to the game. A key switch 93), and a display section (performance display device 152) capable of displaying information about the set value (information corresponding to the big hit probability, display probability set value) by causing a light emitting member (LED) to emit light. The setting change means includes a first switch (RAM initialization switch 112) for changing the set value (work setting value), and the game control means (game control device 100) has the first switch (RAM). It is possible to change the setting value (work setting value) in response to the operation of the initialization switch 112) and to display information (display probability setting value) on the changed setting value on the display unit (performance display device 152). When changing the set value (work setting value), intermediate information different from the information about the set value before the change (probability set value for display) and the information about the set value after change (probability set value for display) After the (intermediate data) is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152), information on the changed set value (display probability set value) is displayed on the display unit (performance display device 152).

With the above configuration, before and after the change of the probability setting value, the intermediate data whose display mode is different from the information regarding the setting value before and after the change (probability setting value for display) is displayed temporarily, so that the operator can It is possible to identify whether or not the display of the display unit (performance display device 152) responds to the operation of the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).

In the present embodiment, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is the same regardless of the set value (work setting value), and corresponds to the probability value that the game has a special result.

In the above-mentioned configuration, the information regarding the set value (display probability set value) is not changed before and after the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed, but since the intermediate data is displayed, the operation unit (RAM initial It is possible to identify whether or not the display on the display unit (performance display device 152) responds to the operation of the digitization switch 112).

The present embodiment is characterized in that the intermediate information (intermediate data) is information for turning off all the light emitting members (LEDs) or information for turning on all the light emitting members.

With the above configuration, it is possible to easily identify the change from the information about the set value before the change (display probability set value) to the information about the changed set value (display probability set value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has a plurality of digits, and the intermediate information (intermediate data) is a digit different from the digit for displaying the information regarding the set value (display probability set value). Is displayed.

With the above configuration, the display of the intermediate data indicates that the display unit (performance display device 152) is responding to the operation, and the information about the set value (probability set value for display) is not erased. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the probability setting value).

In the present embodiment, the display unit (performance display device 152) has information regarding the setting value (display probability setting value) and additional information (Dp=1) different from the information regarding the setting value (display probability setting value). , And the setting change means (RAM initialization switch 112, setting key switch 93) is a second switch for shifting to a setting variable state in which the setting value (working setting value) can be changed. (Setting key switch 93) is provided, and the second switch (setting key switch 93) changes its state between a first state that allows the transition to the setting variable state and a second state that ends the setting variable state. It is possible, and the game control means (game control device 100) transmits (displays) the additional information (Dp=1) together with the information about the set value (display probability set value) in the first state, and the second state. At this time, the transmission (display) of the additional information is stopped (dot data (Dp=0) is transmitted), and the intermediate information (intermediate data) includes the additional information (dot data (Dp=1)).

With the above configuration, even if the operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) is pressed during the setting change, the LED (segment Dp) indicating that the setting is being changed is maintained without being turned off, so that the setting is being changed. The reliability of the display indicating can be improved.

In the present embodiment, an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling effects related to the game is provided, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) controls the effect based on a set value (work setting value). The game control means (game control device 100) transmits information on the changed setting values (final work setting value, probability setting value) to the effect control means (effect control device 300).

With the above configuration, since the effect corresponding to the changed set value can be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine 10 by giving a variation to the effect.

[Third Embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The third embodiment relates to acceptance of an input in a setting change state.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
First, with reference to FIG. 76, a probability setting change/confirmation process according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the third embodiment.

In the probability setting change/confirmation process according to the third embodiment, the processes of A2601 and A2602 are added to the probability setting change/confirmation process according to the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input from a predetermined switch after performing the processing from step A2401 to step A2410 as described above in the probability setting change/confirmation processing according to the first embodiment (A2601). ). The input of the predetermined switch is, for example, an input of a starting opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a), a gate switch 34a, and winning opening switches 35a to 35n. In addition, the input of a predetermined switch, such as a specific area switch 72, special winning opening device 38, 39 special winning opening switch 43, remaining ball discharge port 73, out ball detection switch 74, such as interface chip (proximity I / F ) 121 may be included (see FIG. 3).

If there is a predetermined switch input (result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 executes a process corresponding to the switch input (A2602) and ends the probability setting change/confirmation process.

In the process corresponding to the switch input (A2602), the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command indicating that there is a switch input to the effect control device 300. Further, the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 by the processing of step B3302 of the single-shot system command processing to be described later, thereby turning on the start port LED and the like. Similarly, the game control device 100 may output an ON/OFF drive signal to the collective display device 50 via the second driver 138b and the third driver 138c to light the collective display device 50.

On the other hand, if there is no input from the predetermined switch (result of A2601 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process as it is.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing according to the third embodiment.

In the one-shot system command process according to the third embodiment, the processes of B3301 and B3302 are added in addition to the one-shot system command process according to the first embodiment.

After performing the processing of steps B1301 to B1327 as described above in the one-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment, the effect control device 300 does not display the setting confirmation system command in the MODE part (B1327). Result of "N"), the MODE section determines whether it is within the range of the switch input command (B3301). When the MODE part is within the range of the switch input command, the effect control device 300 has received the switch input command from the game control device 100 and determines that there is a switch input.

When the MODE part represents a switch input command (result of B3301 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 executes the switch input process (B3302), and then ends the single shot system command process.

In the switch input process (B3302), the effect control device 300 lights the start port LED or displays check items on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the switch input command. The effect control device 300 may sequentially turn on the decorative LEDs when the switch input command is received, or may operate the movable accessory or the speaker 19 (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

On the other hand, when the MODE part does not represent the switch input command (result of B3301 is “N”), the effect control device 300, after the step B1329 as described above in the single-shot system command processing according to the first embodiment. Process.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
Details of the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) in the above-described main process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall/player setting mode process according to the third embodiment. By the hall/player setting mode processing, a hall (playing shop) manager activates a hall setting mode in which various settings of the gaming machine 10 can be performed, or a player setting mode in which the player can perform various settings of the gaming machine 10. be able to.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is in the hall setting mode (B0401). When the hole setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the hole setting mode is being executed. When the hall setting mode is in effect (result of B0401 is “Y”), the process of B0406-B0416 is performed, and the operation of the effect button 25 (effect button switch 25a, touch panel 25b) by the person in charge of the hall (game shop). Based on, various settings and various adjustments are made.

When the hall setting mode is not in effect (result of B0401 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not player setting mode is in effect (B0402). When a player setting mode flag, which will be described later, is set, it can be determined that the player setting mode is being executed. When in the player setting mode (the result of B0402 is “Y”), the processes of B0420-B0425 are performed, and various settings and various adjustments are performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player.

When the player setting mode is not in effect (result of B0402 is “N”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0403). For example, when the operation of the effect button 25 for entering the hall setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for customers or in the setting change state, the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied. You can judge that you did. It should be noted that “waiting for customers” means a state in which a video for customer waiting (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41, for example. In addition, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened in the setting change state (error related to front frame opening error/incorrect system command is received (B1316)), effect button input processing (B0010). ), the hall setting mode may be entered when the operation of the effect button 25 is detected as an operation signal. When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (result of B0403 is “N”), the processing of B0417 is executed.

The effect control device 300 draws a screen for starting screen drawing (drawing of the hall setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode when the hall setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0403 is “Y”). Start setting is performed (B0404). Then, the hall setting mode flag is set (B0405).

Next, the effect control device 300 adjusts and sets the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the person in charge of the hall, the hall volume adjusting process (B0406), the frame decoration device 18, and the like. Hall LED brightness adjustment processing (B0407) for adjusting and setting the LED brightness of the panel decoration device 46, liquid crystal brightness adjusting processing (B0408) for adjusting and setting the brightness of the display unit (liquid crystal display, etc.) of the display device 41, power saving The power saving setting process (B0409) for setting the above is executed. The volume of the speaker, the brightness of the LED, the set value of the brightness of the display device 41, and the set value of the power saving setting are set values in the hall setting mode.

Next, the production control device 300 executes a logo color setting process for setting the issue color of the logo accessory (B0410). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0411). When an operation signal for the setting confirmation operation of the effect button 25 is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that the setting confirmation operation input has been made. When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0411 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended.

When there is a setting confirming operation input (result of B0411 is “Y”), effect control device 300 determines whether or not the setting has been confirmed by the factory setting (B0412). When there is no operation of the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the setting has been confirmed with the factory settings. If it is not confirmed by the factory settings (the result of B0412 is “N”), the process proceeds to B0414. When it is confirmed by the factory default setting (the result of B0412 is “Y”), the factory default setting process for performing various settings and various adjustments according to the factory default setting is executed (B0413). The factory settings are the default settings stored in the memory such as the ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or the hall adjusting data) such as the volume and the various luminances determined in B0406-B0410 or B0413 is written in the backup memory (eg FeRAM 323) (B0414).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, the flag in the hall setting mode is cleared (B0416).

When the hall setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0403 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is satisfied when the operation of the effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010) while waiting for the customer. When the player setting mode start condition is not satisfied (the result of B0417 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended.

When the player setting mode start condition is satisfied (the result of B0417 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs screen drawing start setting for starting screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode ( B0418). Then, the player setting mode flag is set (B0419).

Next, the effect control device 300, based on the operation of the effect button 25 by the player, the player volume adjustment processing (B0420) for adjusting the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration. A player LED brightness adjustment process (B0421) for adjusting the brightness of the LED of the device 46 is executed.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customizing process described later for customizing (individual setting) the effect based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the like by the player (B0422). Then, it is determined whether or not there is a setting confirmation operation input (B0423). When there is no setting confirmation operation input (the result of B0423 is “N”), the hall/player setting mode process is ended. When the setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B0423 is “Y”), the screen drawing end setting for ending the screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode is performed (B0424). Then, the player setting mode flag is cleared (B0425). Note that the player setting data (or the player adjustment data) such as the volume and the brightness determined in B0420-B0421 may be erased and is not written in the backup memory.

In the above description, the drawing update setting (such as updating highlight items in the menu display) after once entering the hall setting mode or the player setting mode is performed by the effect button input process (B0010).

[Game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 79 is a front view of the game board 30 in the setting change state according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 (including the center case 40) according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of the board decoration device 46 capable of emitting light are provided in front of the universal figure starting gate 34 and each. They are provided in front of the general winning opening 35 and respectively. The LED provided in front of the universal figure starting gate 34 is a universal figure starting gate LED 34L, and the LED provided in front of each general winning opening 35 is a general winning opening LED 35L.

When the effect control device 300 according to the third embodiment enters the setting change state, the effect control device 300 receives a command that the probability setting is being changed, and the display screen of the display device 41 indicates that the setting is being changed. Characters are displayed (B1326 setting change system information setting process).

Here, the game control device 100, in the setting change state (setting change state, setting change mode), in the processing of steps A2601 and A2602 of the probability setting change/confirmation processing as described above with reference to FIG. Functioning as a control means capable of accepting inputs from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, which are different from the inputs relating to the change. When the game control device 100 receives an input from the gate switch 34a or the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the game control device 100 transmits a switch input command corresponding to the received input to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 in the processing of steps B3301 and B3302 of the single shot system command processing of FIG. 77, the LED of the panel decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command. (Universal figure starting gate LED34L and general winning a prize LED35L) is lit or blinked.

Therefore, in the setting change state, by passing or winning the game ball through the universal figure starting gate 34 or each general winning opening 35, the corresponding universal figure starting gate LED 34L or general winning edge LED 35L lights up or blinks. The operation check can be easily performed, and the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved. As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

In addition, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the LEDs (the universal figure starting gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L) of the panel decoration device 46 corresponding to the switch input command, and then sequentially turns the other unsupported LEDs. It may be lit or blinked. According to such an aspect, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LEDs of the various board decoration devices 46 simply by receiving any switch input command from the game control device 100. Therefore, maintenance of the gaming machine 10 is performed. It is possible to improve the sex.

In addition, the game control device 100, in response to receiving the input from the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switches 35a to 35n, the display units 51 to 60 (LED lamp, special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50). , Special figure 2 display 52, public figure display section 53, special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, public figure hold indicator 56, first game state display section 57, second game state display The section 58, the third gaming state display section 59, and the round display section 60) may be turned on or off as appropriate. The game control device 100 turns on or blinks the display unit (one of the display units 51 to 60) of the collective display device 50 corresponding to the received input, and then all the display units (display units 51 to 60). May be turned on or blinking so that the operation of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 can be checked (processing of A2602). Further, the operation check of the entire display units 51 to 60 of the collective display device 50 is not limited to the mode of all lighting or all blinking, but may be the mode of cyclic lighting so that it is easy to confirm that normal light emission is performed.

Further, when the effect control device 300 receives the switch input command from the game control device 100 and performs the switch input time process (B3302), as shown in FIG. 79, a check table is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. It may be displayed. In the check table, for each switch item corresponding to the received input, a normal operation checked display such as "○" is displayed.

The effect control device 300 starts the check table as shown in FIG. 79 in response to the game control device 100 accepting the input of the start opening switch (start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a). A normal operation checked display (“◯”) may be displayed in the items of the mouth 1 and the starting mouth 2.

Further, an LED (starting winning opening LED 36L) of the panel decoration device 46 is provided in front of the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1, first starting winning area), and the LED is turned on in accordance with a corresponding switch input command. Alternatively, it may blink. Further, the effect control device 300 may operate the speaker 19 (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) as a device for effect in accordance with a corresponding switch input command. At that time, the effect control device 300 can, for example, when the switch input command corresponding to the gate switch 34a is received, give a voice notification as "Universal figure start gate!", and when the switch input command corresponding to the winning opening switches 35a to 35n is received. You can make a voice alert saying "General prize!"

Furthermore, while the setting is being changed, the game control device 100 receives a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 that is output when the front frame 12 and the like are open, and issues an error/illegal command to the effect control device 300. When the effect control device 300 receives the operation of the effect button 25 during the transmission, the effect control device 300 determines that the process of step B0403 of the hall/player setting mode process is established as described above with reference to FIG. 78. The determination is made (the result of B0403 is “Y”).

Therefore, the effect control device 300 will execute the processing of step B0404 and thereafter, so that the hall setting can be performed during the setting change. In this way, the game control device 100 functions as a control means capable of accepting the signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 as an input different from the input regarding the change of the set value in the setting change state. Further, the effect control device 300 accepts the operation of the effect button 25 in a state where the front frame 12 or the like is opened, and thus accepts the input regarding the hall setting as an input different from the input regarding the change of the set value during the setting change state, It functions as a control unit that can change the set value of the hall setting (for example, speaker volume, LED brightness, etc.).

[Another example of a game board whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 80 is another example of the front view of the game board 30 during the setting change according to the third embodiment.

In the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 80, in addition to the universal figure starting gate LED 34L, the general winning opening LED 35L, the starting winning opening LED 36L, the universal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation. The winning LED 38L and the second special variation winning LED 39L are also caused to emit light. The universal figure variable prize LED 37L is an LED provided in front of the normal variable prize device 37 (starting opening 2, second starting winning opening). The first special variable prize LED 38L is an LED provided in front of the first special variable prize device 38, and the second special variable prize LED 39L is an LED provided in front of the second special variable prize device 39.

The normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, and the second special variation winning device 39, whose settings are being changed, are closed by a slide opening/closing movable member 37b and attacker-type opening/closing doors 38c, 39c, respectively.

Therefore, the effect control device 300 lights or blinks the universal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, and the second special variation winning LED 39L in response to the production button 25 or the like being pressed during the setting change, for example. Can be made. It should be noted that lighting of the universal figure variation winning LED 37L, the first special variation winning LED 38L, the second special variation winning LED 39L, etc. may be performed in order or at the same time.

In addition, when there is a predetermined switch input (result of A2601 is “Y”), the game control device 100 opens the movable member 37b and the opening/closing doors 38c and 39c to open the normal variation winning device 37 and the first prize. The game balls may be directly awarded to the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39.

Further, in the game board 30 of another example, the effect control device 300 can cause the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL that are the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 to emit light. The upper effect unit LED 40cL is an LED provided in the upper effect unit 40c. The side effect unit LED 40dL is an LED provided on the blade portion of the sword held by the character of the side effect unit 40d. The effect control device 300 lights or blinks the upper effect unit LED 40cL and the side effect unit LED 40dL in response to the effect button 25 or the like being pressed during the setting change, for example. The lighting of the upper performance unit LED 40cL and the side performance unit LED 40dL may be performed sequentially or simultaneously.

In this way, by making the LED of the accessory (decorative member) emit light in addition to the LED of the winning port or the prize winning device, the operation check of the LED of the accessory (decorative member) can be easily performed. The maintainability can be improved. It should be noted that the maintainability may be further improved by moving the movable accessory or the like as an effect device during light emission so that the motor of the movable accessory or the like can be confirmed to move normally.

Further, the effect control device 300, for example, in response to pressing the effect button 25 or the like during the setting change, the lamp display device 80 (lamp display parts 1 to 6 (LED) provided on the lower right side of the game area 32. )) may be combined and emitted.

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the stop result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the identification information (identification information, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol A to C, this special symbol) is variably displayed When the special result (big hit result) is obtained, a special game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player can be generated. The gaming machine 10 includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) for performing control related to the game, and setting change means (setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing set values related to the game condition. , Is provided. The control means can accept an input different from the input relating to the change of the set value when the set value is changeable by the setting changing means (setting change state, setting change mode).

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the control means can accept an input relating to management and maintenance of the gaming machine 10 such as hall setting and operation check when the setting value is in a setting changeable state. The manageability and maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) has a predetermined input (front frame open) that is different from the input relating to the change of the set value during the setting change state. Upon receiving the signal from the detection switch 64 and the signal from the effect button 25, it is possible to change not only the set value but also the set value different from the set value (set value in the hall setting) during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the setting value of the hall setting can be changed as a setting value different from the setting value relating to the game condition in the setting change state, the person in charge of the game hall (game shop) It is possible to improve maintainability. In addition, normally, the setting change state is changed by the operation of the person in charge at the game hall (game shop), so by making it possible to change the set value of the hall setting in the setting change state, It is possible to prevent the setting value of the hall setting from being unnecessarily changed by a person who is not in charge of.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is a collective display device in addition to a light emitting device that can emit light (LEDs of the board decoration device 46 (particularly the LEDs before the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening)). 50 display units 51 to 60), a predetermined area provided in the game area 32, in which the game ball can enter or pass, and a detection unit capable of detecting the entrance or passage of the game ball in the predetermined area. Prepare When the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) receives an input from the detection means as a different input, it causes the light emitting device to emit light.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to easily check the operation that the various detecting means can normally detect the game ball and the various light emitting devices normally emit light in the setting change state. The maintainability of the machine 10 can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a plurality of light emitting devices (LEDs and the like for the board decoration device 46, and devices for production) are provided. The control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300) can sequentially change the display of the plurality of light emitting devices to a predetermined display mode (e.g., light emission) during the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, when the effect control device 300 only receives one of the switch input commands from the game control device 100, various light-emitting devices (of the panel decoration device 46 are displayed during the setting change state). Since it becomes possible to easily check the operation of the LED and the production device, the maintainability of the gaming machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided in a play device (display device 41, board decoration device 46, lamp display device 80, etc.) capable of displaying a display related to a play, and a game ball is provided in the game area 32. Predetermined area in which the ball can be entered or passed (universal figure starting gate 34, each general winning opening 35, first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area), second starting winning opening (second starting winning area of normal variation winning device 37) (Winning area) and the like) and detecting means (gate switch 34a, winning opening switches 35a to 35n, starting opening switch, etc.) capable of detecting entry or passage of a game ball to a predetermined area. When the control means receives an input from the detection means as a different input, the control means can change the display of the performance device to a predetermined display mode (LED emission, normal operation checked display on the check table).

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, in the setting change state, by passing or entering the game ball into the universal figure starting gate 34 or each general winning opening 35 as a predetermined area, the corresponding universal figure is obtained. Since the start gate LED 34L and the general winning opening LED 35L can be turned on or off, and a check table for passing or entering the ball can be displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to easily perform an operation check and improve the maintainability of the gaming machine 10. You can As a result, for example, it becomes possible to easily confirm the operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of factory shipment, so that the gaming machine 10 having an initial failure can be detected early.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is a production device capable of performing production (in addition to the LEDs of the display device 41 and the board decoration device 46, the speaker 19, the top production of the board production device 44 (movable accessory, etc.). The unit 40c, the side effect unit 40d, etc.) are provided. The control means (production control device 300) can operate the production device in the setting change state.

According to such a gaming machine 10, for example, as a production device, in addition to the light emission of the LED of the panel decoration device 46, the speaker 19 notifies the voice, and when emitting light, a movable accessory or the like is moved as a production device. By doing so, when the setting is changed, it is possible to easily check the operation of the LED of the board production device 44 and the operation of the motor of the speaker 19, the movable accessory, etc., and further improve the maintainability of the gaming machine 10. Can be made.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 86. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted. The fourth embodiment relates to the operation of the gaming machine 10 when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and the power is restored.

[Timing chart in special game state of normal operation]
First, with reference to FIG. 81, the timing of signal output and the like in the normal operation special game state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like in the special game state of the normal operation according to the fourth embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 81, at the time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, external information in the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) or the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 38). As the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) saved in the output data area, for example, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. The signal regarding the start of the big hit is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and thus to an external device (hall computer or the like). Specifically, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are started to be output when the stop result (display result) of the variable display game becomes the big hit result (special result). The power of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal is off.

The jackpot 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing (A5714) of the processing during display of special figure 1 (FIG. 37) when the special display 1 variable display game is a big hit, or When the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting process (A5816) of the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 38). The big hit 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area in step A5709 of the special figure 1 displaying process (FIG. 37) when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, or the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit. In the case of, in step A5811 of the special figure 2 displaying process (FIG. 38), the data is saved in the external information output data area.

When the first big hit ends at time t2, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Specifically, the output of the jackpot 1 signal is that the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area by the end of the special game state, that is, the jackpot end processing (FIG. 40, FIG. 41) after the round game. Then it will be turned off. On the other hand, after the end of the first big hit, it is in a time-saving state (normal electric power support state, specific game state) or a probability change state (specific game state, probability fluctuation state), and the output of the big jack 2 signal remains on To be done.

Specifically, when the big hit 1 signal off data is the end of the big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Therefore, step A6112 of the special figure 1 big hit end processing (FIG. 40). Is saved in the external information output data area. When the big hit 1 signal off data is the end of the big hit by the special figure 2 variable display game, the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Therefore, in step A6212 of the special figure 2 big hit end processing (FIG. 41), external information is output. It is saved in the output data area.

When the big hit 2 signal is in the time saving state after the big hit ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6501 of the big hit end setting process 2 and the output (on state) continues. Further, when the big hit 2 signal is in the probable change state after the big hit ends, it is saved in the external information output data area in step A6801 of the big hit end setting process 3, and the output (on state) continues.

Then, at the time t3, when the big hit occurs again, that is, the second big hit occurs, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned on.

Then, at the time t4, when the second big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. Further, the second big hit corresponds to a normal big hit pattern (for example, a 10R normal big hit pattern), the time reduction determination data is data with time reduction, and there is no specific area passage information (the result of A6104 is "N. )) (no V winnings), the jackpot end setting process 2 is executed (A6103). Therefore, after the second big hit ends, it will be in a time saving state (universal power support state).

After that, at time t5, when the variable display game in the time saving state reaches, for example, 100 times after the second big hit ends, the remaining number of games in the time saving state (the number of times of time shortening variation) becomes 0 and the time saving state ends. To do. At that time, the output of the two big hit signals is turned off by saving the off data of the two big hit signals in the external information output data area in step A5105 of the time shortening variation number updating process. Further, when the game including the special game state and the like is performed in the normal operation in this way, the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is maintained in the on state, and the security signal remains off.

Unlike the above, when the probability variation state is reached after the second big hit, the probability variation state ends when the falling lottery is won in the falling lottery process (FIG. 20), and at that time, the jackpot 2 signal is output. The off data of 2 signals of the big hit are saved in the external information output data area (A3704), so that the off data is turned off.

[Timing chart for normal recovery after power failure in special gaming state]
With reference to FIG. 82, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special gaming state and normal recovery is performed by power recovery will be described. FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and the power is restored normally. Note that in FIGS. 82 to 86 below, the description overlapping with the content described in FIG. 81 and the like will be appropriately omitted.

At time t1, when the first big hit (special game state) occurs, as in FIG. 81 described above, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are output. Further, the security signal is maintained in the off state.

At time t11, when a power failure occurs during the first big hit (for example, during a round game), the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off and the big hit game is interrupted, as shown in FIG. Further, as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are also turned off.

At time t12, when power is restored (power failure is restored) and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration processing (A1045) of the main processing. The output state (on state) of the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal is saved (stored) in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and the game control device 100 outputs the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal when the power is restored. Saved data (stored information) about the output state, that is, the big hit state is internally held (maintained). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal that were on before the power outage are turned on, and the first jackpot game is restarted.

At the time t13, when the first big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (universal power support state) or a probability changing state (specific game state, probability changing state), and the output of two big hit signals is kept on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from the time t14 to the time t16 is the same as the signal output from the time t3 to the time t5 described above with reference to FIG. 81.

Even when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are similarly turned off. Then, when the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure by the power failure restoration processing (A1045) of the main processing, and the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability variation state is restarted. can do.

[Timing chart when a memory error occurs after a power failure in the special gaming state]
With reference to FIG. 83, in the fourth embodiment, the timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state and a memory abnormality occurs in power recovery will be described. FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of timing of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment and a memory abnormality occurs in power recovery.

At time t1, after the first big hit (special game state) occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1, the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t21. When it occurs, the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are turned off as the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

At time t22, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, if a memory abnormality occurs in the RAM (here, the RAM 111c), the output of the security signal is turned on. Specifically, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is set in the main processing (result of A1022 is “Y”), ON data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal (A1026). Further, while the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeatedly waited, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegality of the RAM abnormality from being reflected in the game.

The output state (ON state) of the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (stored information) at the time of power failure is read by power failure recovery processing at the time of power recovery. Therefore, at the time of normal restoration, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals can be output as shown by the broken line in FIG. However, since the RAM memory abnormality has occurred, the game control device 100 turns on the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83, while holding one jackpot signal as shown by the broken line in FIG. And the jackpot 2 signals are not output.

Then, at time t23, the power is once turned off, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 93 (setting key) and the RAM initialization switch 112 are pressed (on) when the power is then turned on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the state is changed to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state), the probability setting value is cleared because of RAM abnormality (A1028), and the security signal is turned on (A1034). Then, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”) and the setting change state ends, the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042) and initialized. (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Further, the memory abnormality of the gaming machine 10 is resolved. On the other hand, the jackpot state is also reset, the gaming machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol also becomes a detached symbol.

Even when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state, or the probability changing state, similarly, the memory abnormality occurs, the RAM is cleared and the initialization is performed, and the gaming machine 10 is set to the normal gaming state. Become.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting confirmation state after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 84, in the fourth embodiment, a power outage occurs in the special game state, normal recovery by power recovery, and timing of signal output and the like when shifting to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) will be described. To do. FIG. 84 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, a normal recovery is performed by power recovery, and a transition is made to the setting confirmation state.

At time t1, after the first big hit occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1 and then the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t31, the gaming machine 10 When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t32, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (the RAM initialization switch 112 is off) and the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability setting confirming flag is set. Then, (A1032), the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be confirmed (A1305).

When shifting to the setting confirmation state at time t32, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 84 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 83 (A2406).

As described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of power failure (A1057, A1058), and at the time of power recovery is also shown by a broken line in FIG. As described above, the save data regarding the output state (ON state) of the one big hit signal and the two big hit signals is held.

Then, at time t33, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (the result of A1036 is “Y”), and the power failure recovery process is performed (A1045), the security signal is turned off.

Also, the output state of the jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal saved (stored) in the RAM as save data (stored information) at the time of power failure is read in the power failure recovery process and turned on after the setting confirmation state is completed. Become. Therefore, when the setting confirmation state ends, the first big hit game is restarted. Then, the same number of rounds as the big hit game (special game) when the normal operation is performed without the occurrence of a power failure is consumed over the same time.

At the time t34, when the first big hit ends, the output of the big hit 1 signal is turned off. On the other hand, after the first big hit, it is in a time saving state (universal power support state) or a probability changing state (specific game state, probability changing state), and the output of two big hit signals is kept on.

After that, the signal output after the occurrence of the second big hit from the time t35 to the time t36 is the same as the signal output from the time t3 to the time t5 described above with reference to FIG. 81.

In addition, when a power failure occurs during the second big hit or during a time saving state or a probability changing state, and the power is restored and the state shifts to the setting confirmation state, when the setting confirmation state ends, a power failure recovery process (A1045) in the main process causes the game to play. The machine 10 is normally restored to the state before the power failure, and the second big hit, the time-saving state or the probability variation state can be restarted.

[Timing chart when shifting to the setting change state after a power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 85, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special gaming state, a normal output is restored by power recovery, and a signal output when shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state), etc. The timing of will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of timings of signal output and the like when a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, a normal recovery is performed by power recovery, and a transition is made to the setting change state.

At time t1, after the first big hit occurs and the big hit 1 signal and big hit 2 signal are output at time t1 and then the power failure occurs during the first big hit at time t41, the gaming machine 10 When the power is turned off, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals are also turned off.

At time t42, when the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed (turned on), the power is restored and the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The medium flag is set (A1029), and the gaming machine 10 shifts to a setting change state in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (A1305).

When shifting to the setting change state at time t42, a security signal is output as shown in FIG. 85 (A2406). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 85 (A2406).

Note that, as described above with reference to FIG. 83, the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is saved in the RAM at the time of a power failure (A1057, A1058), and at the time of power recovery is also shown by a broken line in FIG. As described above, the save data regarding the output state (on state) of one big hit signal and two big hit signals is held.

Then, at time t43, the setting key switch 93 of the gaming machine 10 is turned off (result of A1036 is “Y”), and the probability setting changing flag is set (result of A1040 is “Y”). ), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (RAM clear) (A1042) and initialized (A1043, A1044). Therefore, the security signal is turned off, and the held jackpot 1 signal and jackpot 2 signal are also turned off. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, when the setting change state ends, the jackpot state is reset by the RAM clearing, which is a normal recovery, and becomes the normal gaming state, and the stop symbol also becomes a symbol.

Even when the power failure occurs during the second big hit, the time saving state or the probability changing state, when the setting change state ends, the RAM clear and the initialization are performed, and the gaming machine 10 is in the normal game state. Becomes

[Timing chart when the power is turned off in the setting change state after the power failure in the special game state]
Referring to FIG. 86, in the fourth embodiment, a power failure occurs in the special game state, normal recovery is restored by power recovery, and the power is turned off after shifting to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state). The timing of signal output and the like when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 86 is an example of the timing of signal output, etc. when the power is turned off after a power failure occurs in the special game state according to the fourth embodiment, the power is restored normally after the power is restored, and the setting is changed. 3 is a timing chart showing

The signal output when a power failure occurs after the first big hit from time t1 to time t52 and the power is restored in the setting changed state is similar to the signal output from time t1 to time t42 described above with reference to FIG. 85. At the time t52, when transitioning to the setting change state, the probability setting changing flag is set (A1029), similarly to the time t42 in FIG.

After that, at time t53, when the power is turned off (or another power failure occurs) in the setting change state, the output of the security signal is turned off. As shown by the broken line in FIG. 85, as in the broken lines up to FIG. 84, save data regarding the output state (on state) of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal is held. Further, since the save data saved in the RAM cannot be read when the power is turned off, the broken lines of the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 2 signal are off when the power is off. The probability setting changing flag remains set (the result of A1037 is “Y”, A1057, A1058).

At time t54, when the power is turned on without the RAM initialization switch 112 being turned on (result of A1021 is “N”), the probability setting changing flag is set (from A1023). The result is “Y”), and ON data of the security signal is output (A1026). On the other hand, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are turned off as signals other than the security signal as shown by the solid line in FIG. 86 (A1026). Therefore, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal are not output, although the output state (on state) is held as save data in the RAM as shown by the broken line in FIG. Further, while the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, so that the game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected process (a process of power failure and power recovery in a setting change state) from being reflected in the game. Thereafter, the RAM is cleared similarly to the time t23 in FIG. 83 (A1042), whereby the normal state can be restored, and at that time, the jackpot state is reset.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (big hit result). A control means (game control device 100) capable of generating (big hit game state) is provided. The game machine 10 is provided with a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) capable of storing information about a game and storing and storing the stored information even when a power failure occurs. The control means can output a signal (one big hit signal) triggered by the occurrence of the special gaming state, and hold it during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. When the abnormality of the information recorded in the storage means is detected, the security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and the signal (one big hit signal) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, when an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state. Does not output a signal (one big hit signal) that is output upon the occurrence of a special gaming state, but outputs a security signal, so that it is possible to inform that the gaming machine has been tampered with when the power is restored. .. By the notification of fraud, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the fraud.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can output a signal (big hit 1 signal) triggered by the occurrence of the special game state (big hit game state), and a set value after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state. Outputs a security signal for notifying an abnormality during the restart process when a power failure occurs and power is restored in a setting change state (setting change mode, setting change state) that can be changed. Is not output.

According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the signal (big signal 1) that is output when the special gaming state is generated is not output during the restart process when the power is restored and the power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to inform that the game machine is performing an unexpected process in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the unexpected processing (processing for power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is a special game which is advantageous to the player when the result (stop result) of the game (for example, special figure variation display game, variation display game) is a special result (big hit result). It is provided with control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a game state (big hit game state) and a specific game state (time saving state, probability variation state). The game machine 10 is provided with a holding storage means (RAM of the game control device 100) capable of storing information about a game and storing and storing the stored information even when a power failure occurs. The control means can start outputting a signal (big signal 2 signals) upon occurrence of the special game state, and can output the signal until the specific game state after the special game state ends, the special game state or the specific game state. If an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding/storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs while the status is occurring, a security signal is sent to notify the abnormality. Outputs and does not output signals (2 signals for big hits).

According to such a gaming machine 10, after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, an abnormality in the information recorded in the holding storage means is generated during the restart process when the power is restored. When detected, the security signal is output without outputting the signal (two signals for big hit) that is output when the special game state occurs, so that the game machine is fraudulent when the power is restored. You can inform that. By the notification of fraud, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the fraud.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is provided with setting changing means (game control device 100, setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of changing the setting value (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. The control means (game control device 100) can start outputting a signal (big hit 2 signal) upon occurrence of a special game state (big hit game state), and a specific game state (time saving state, probability changing state) after the special game state. The signal can be output until the end of, and after a power failure occurs during the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, the power failure occurs in the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the set value can be changed. Then, during the restart process when the power is restored, the security signal for notifying the abnormality is output, and the signal (2 signals for big hit) is not output.

According to such a gaming machine 10, a signal (two jackpots) output upon occurrence of the special gaming state is not output during the restart process when a power failure occurs and power is restored in the setting change state. Since the security signal is output, it is possible to inform that the game machine is performing an unexpected process in the setting change state. By this notification, the person in charge at the game arcade (gaming store) can take measures against the unexpected processing (processing for power failure and power recovery in the setting change state) performed on the gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is shown by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalency of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 12 Front Frame (Game Frame)
25 Production Button 30 Game Board 32 Game Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variable winning device 38 First special variable winning device 39 Second special variable winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 44 Board production device 46 Board decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
93 setting key switch 100 game control device (main board)
112 RAM initialization switch 152 Performance display device 200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
400 power supply

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with control means capable of generating a special game state and a specific game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Information about games is stored, and even if there is a power outage, it is provided with a holding storage means capable of storing and holding the stored information,
The control means is
A signal can be started upon the occurrence of the special game state, and the signal can be output until the specific game state after the special game state ends.
If an abnormality in the information recorded in the storage means is detected during the restart process when the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special gaming state or the specific gaming state, A gaming machine, which outputs a security signal for notifying an abnormality and does not output the signal. In a gaming machine provided with control means capable of generating a special game state and a specific game state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Equipped with setting change means that can change the setting values related to game conditions,
The control means is
A signal can be started upon the occurrence of the special game state, and the signal can be output until the specific game state after the special game state ends.
After a power failure occurs during the occurrence of the special game state or the specific game state, to notify of an abnormality during the restart process when the power is restored due to a power failure in the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed The security machine outputs the security signal and does not output the security signal.